OceanStor Dorado

6.1

Basic Storage Service Configuration

Guide for Block

Issue 02
Date 2022-01-25

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2022. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: https://e.huawei.com

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the basic storage services and explains how to configure
and manage them.
The following table lists the product models that this document is applicable to.

Product Model Product Version

OceanStor Dorado 3000 6.1.0

6.1.2
OceanStor Dorado 5000
6.1.3
OceanStor Dorado 6000

OceanStor Dorado 8000

OceanStor Dorado 18000

NOTICE

This document is updated periodically with the software version. The operations
described in this document use the latest version as an example. Note that the
supported functions and features vary according to the software version. The
content in this document is for reference only.

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
● Technical support engineers
● Maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which,

if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk

which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which,

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,

if not avoided, could result in equipment damage,
data loss, performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.

Supplements the important information in the

main text.
NOTE is used to address information not related
to personal injury, equipment damage, and
environment deterioration.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue
contains all the changes made in earlier issues.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25)
This issue is the second official release.
Added the configuration of LLDP.

Issue 01 (2021-09-30)
This issue is the first official release.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block Contents

Contents

About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................. 1
2 Basic Storage Service Overview........................................................................................... 3
2.1 Basic Storage Principles.........................................................................................................................................................3
2.1.1 Basic Concepts...................................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1.2 Basic Storage Principles with Disk Redundancy........................................................................................................ 5
2.1.2.1 RAID 2.0+ Block Virtualization Process..................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.2.2 RAID Usage......................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.1.3 Basic Storage Principles with Enclosure Redundancy..............................................................................................9
2.1.3.1 Enclosure Redundancy.................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.3.2 RAID 2.0+ Block Virtualization Process...................................................................................................................12
2.1.3.3 RAID Usage...................................................................................................................................................................... 13
2.1.4 Dynamic RAID Reconstruction...................................................................................................................................... 14
2.1.5 Global Garbage Collection............................................................................................................................................. 16
2.1.6 Terms Related to System Capacity.............................................................................................................................. 17
2.1.7 Scenarios Where the LUN Write Mode Changes to Write Protection.............................................................20
2.2 Symmetric Active-Active Architecture............................................................................................................................22
2.2.1 Intelligent Balancing Architecture............................................................................................................................... 22
2.2.2 Simplified Resource Planning........................................................................................................................................ 24
2.3 Application Scenarios.......................................................................................................................................................... 24

3 Planning Basic Storage Services........................................................................................ 28

3.1 Planning Storage Resources.............................................................................................................................................. 28
3.1.1 Planning the Available Capacity...................................................................................................................................28
3.1.2 Planning Storage Pools....................................................................................................................................................29
3.1.3 Planning LUNs.................................................................................................................................................................... 34
3.2 Planning Management User Accounts.......................................................................................................................... 36

4 Configuring Basic Storage Services................................................................................... 37

4.1 Configuration Process.......................................................................................................................................................... 37
4.2 Check Before Configuration.............................................................................................................................................. 38
4.3 Logging In to DeviceManager.......................................................................................................................................... 44
4.4 Creating a Storage Pool...................................................................................................................................................... 44
4.4.1 Creating a Storage Pool (Applicable to 6.1.0)......................................................................................................... 44

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block Contents

4.4.2 Creating a Storage Pool (Applicable to 6.1.2 and Later).....................................................................................50

4.5 Creating a LUN...................................................................................................................................................................... 56
4.5.1 Creating a LUN (Applicable to 6.1.0)......................................................................................................................... 57
4.5.2 Creating a LUN (Applicable to 6.1.2 and Later)..................................................................................................... 61
4.6 (Optional) Creating a LUN Group...................................................................................................................................65
4.7 Creating a Host...................................................................................................................................................................... 69
4.7.1 Creating a Host.................................................................................................................................................................. 69
4.7.2 Creating Hosts in Batches...............................................................................................................................................75
4.8 (Optional) Creating a Host Group.................................................................................................................................. 77
4.9 (Optional) Creating a Port Group................................................................................................................................... 79
4.10 Creating a Mapping........................................................................................................................................................... 80
4.11 Configuring the Host Connectivity............................................................................................................................... 82
4.11.1 Configuring Storage Service Ports (Applicable to iSCSI Connections)......................................................... 82
4.11.1.1 Creating a Bond Port.................................................................................................................................................. 84
4.11.1.2 Creating a VLAN.......................................................................................................................................................... 87
4.11.1.3 Creating a Logical Port.............................................................................................................................................. 87
4.11.2 Configuring Connectivity.............................................................................................................................................. 89
4.12 Using the Storage Space on an Application Server................................................................................................ 90
4.13 More Configuration Scenarios....................................................................................................................................... 92
4.13.1 Configuring Basic Storage Services for VMware VVol........................................................................................ 92
4.13.2 Configuring Storage Resources in Batches............................................................................................................. 93
4.13.2.1 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................ 94
4.13.2.2 Preparing a Configuration File................................................................................................................................ 94
4.13.2.2.1 Using a Configuration File Template.................................................................................................................94
4.13.2.2.2 Using a Configuration File Exported from LLDesigner................................................................................95
4.13.2.3 Importing a Configuration File............................................................................................................................... 95
4.13.2.4 Implementing Batch Configuration....................................................................................................................... 96

5 Managing Basic Storage Services...................................................................................... 97

5.1 Managing the Service Network....................................................................................................................................... 97
5.1.1 Managing the FC Network............................................................................................................................................. 97
5.1.1.1 Viewing FC Network Information.............................................................................................................................97
5.1.1.2 Modifying an FC Port.................................................................................................................................................... 99
5.1.1.3 Viewing Bit Error Statistics....................................................................................................................................... 100
5.1.2 Managing the Ethernet Network.............................................................................................................................. 100
5.1.2.1 Managing Ethernet Ports.......................................................................................................................................... 100
5.1.2.1.1 Viewing Ethernet Ports...........................................................................................................................................100
5.1.2.1.2 Viewing Bit Error Statistics.................................................................................................................................... 102
5.1.2.1.3 Configuring LLDP..................................................................................................................................................... 102
5.1.2.2 Managing Bond Ports................................................................................................................................................ 103
5.1.2.2.1 Viewing Bond Ports................................................................................................................................................. 103
5.1.2.2.2 Modifying a Bond Port........................................................................................................................................... 104
5.1.2.2.3 Deleting a Bond Port.............................................................................................................................................. 105

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block Contents

5.1.2.3 Managing VLANs......................................................................................................................................................... 105

5.1.2.3.1 Viewing VLANs.......................................................................................................................................................... 106
5.1.2.3.2 Modifying a VLAN....................................................................................................................................................106
5.1.2.3.3 Deleting a VLAN....................................................................................................................................................... 106
5.1.3 Managing Logical Ports................................................................................................................................................ 107
5.1.3.1 Viewing Logical Ports................................................................................................................................................. 107
5.1.3.2 Modifying a Logical Port........................................................................................................................................... 108
5.1.3.3 Managing Routes.........................................................................................................................................................109
5.1.3.4 Failing Back a Logical Port....................................................................................................................................... 111
5.1.3.5 Deleting a Logical Port.............................................................................................................................................. 111
5.1.4 Managing the RoCE Network..................................................................................................................................... 112
5.1.4.1 Managing RoCE Ports................................................................................................................................................ 112
5.1.4.1.1 Viewing RoCE Ports................................................................................................................................................. 112
5.1.4.1.2 Modifying a RoCE Port........................................................................................................................................... 113
5.1.4.1.3 Batch Setting SNSD................................................................................................................................................. 114
5.1.4.1.4 Viewing Bit Error Statistics.................................................................................................................................... 114
5.1.4.2 Managing VLANs......................................................................................................................................................... 115
5.1.4.2.1 Creating a VLAN....................................................................................................................................................... 115
5.1.4.2.2 Viewing VLANs.......................................................................................................................................................... 115
5.1.4.2.3 Modifying a VLAN....................................................................................................................................................116
5.1.4.2.4 Deleting a VLAN....................................................................................................................................................... 116
5.2 Managing Ports on Controller Enclosures................................................................................................................. 117
5.2.1 Managing Ethernet Ports............................................................................................................................................. 117
5.2.1.1 Viewing Ethernet Ports.............................................................................................................................................. 117
5.2.1.2 Modifying an Ethernet Port..................................................................................................................................... 119
5.2.1.3 Modifying a Management Port.............................................................................................................................. 121
5.2.1.4 Viewing Bit Error Statistics....................................................................................................................................... 122
5.2.1.5 Managing Routes.........................................................................................................................................................122
5.2.1.6 Modifying a Bond Port...............................................................................................................................................124
5.2.1.7 Canceling Ethernet Port Bonding........................................................................................................................... 125
5.2.1.8 Managing VLANs......................................................................................................................................................... 126
5.2.1.9 Viewing RDMA Ports.................................................................................................................................................. 128
5.2.2 Managing SAS Ports.......................................................................................................................................................129
5.2.2.1 Viewing SAS Port Information................................................................................................................................ 129
5.2.2.2 Viewing Bit Error Statistics....................................................................................................................................... 131
5.2.3 Managing FC Ports......................................................................................................................................................... 131
5.2.3.1 Viewing FC Port Information................................................................................................................................... 131
5.2.3.2 Modifying an FC Port................................................................................................................................................. 133
5.2.3.3 Viewing Bit Error Statistics....................................................................................................................................... 134
5.2.4 Managing RoCE Ports.................................................................................................................................................... 135
5.2.4.1 Viewing RoCE Ports..................................................................................................................................................... 135
5.2.4.2 Modifying a RoCE Port.............................................................................................................................................. 137

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block Contents

5.2.4.3 Batch Setting SNSD.................................................................................................................................................... 138

5.2.4.4 Viewing Bit Error Statistics....................................................................................................................................... 139
5.2.4.5 Managing VLANs......................................................................................................................................................... 139
5.3 Managing Storage Pools.................................................................................................................................................. 141
5.3.1 Viewing Storage Pool Information............................................................................................................................ 141
5.3.2 Expanding a Storage Pool............................................................................................................................................ 143
5.3.3 Updating Keys.................................................................................................................................................................. 143
5.3.4 Configuring a Space Reclamation Policy................................................................................................................ 143
5.3.5 Executing Space Reclamation..................................................................................................................................... 144
5.3.6 Stopping Space Reclamation...................................................................................................................................... 144
5.3.7 Exporting Disk Configuration......................................................................................................................................145
5.3.8 Modifying the Properties of a Storage Pool.......................................................................................................... 145
5.3.9 Deleting a Storage Pool................................................................................................................................................ 147
5.4 Managing LUNs.................................................................................................................................................................. 150
5.4.1 Viewing LUN Information............................................................................................................................................ 150
5.4.2 Mapping a LUN............................................................................................................................................................... 152
5.4.3 Unmapping a LUN.......................................................................................................................................................... 153
5.4.4 Expanding a LUN............................................................................................................................................................ 154
5.4.5 Configuring Protection Features................................................................................................................................ 154
5.4.6 Adding a Port Group...................................................................................................................................................... 154
5.4.7 Removing a Port Group................................................................................................................................................ 155
5.4.8 Modifying the Properties of a LUN........................................................................................................................... 155
5.4.9 Deleting a LUN................................................................................................................................................................ 157
5.4.10 Managing the Recycle Bin......................................................................................................................................... 157
5.4.10.1 Viewing LUN Information...................................................................................................................................... 157
5.4.10.2 Restoring a LUN.........................................................................................................................................................159
5.4.10.3 Configuring the Recycle Bin.................................................................................................................................. 159
5.4.10.4 Deleting a LUN...........................................................................................................................................................160
5.5 Managing LUN Groups..................................................................................................................................................... 161
5.5.1 Viewing LUN Group Information............................................................................................................................... 161
5.5.2 Adding a Port Group...................................................................................................................................................... 163
5.5.3 Removing a Port Group................................................................................................................................................ 164
5.5.4 Mapping a LUN Group.................................................................................................................................................. 164
5.5.5 Unmapping a LUN Group............................................................................................................................................ 165
5.5.6 Adding a LUN................................................................................................................................................................... 166
5.5.7 Removing a LUN............................................................................................................................................................. 167
5.5.8 Configuring Protection Features................................................................................................................................ 168
5.5.9 Modifying the Properties of a LUN Group............................................................................................................. 168
5.5.10 Deleting a LUN Group................................................................................................................................................ 169
5.6 Managing VVol.................................................................................................................................................................... 169
5.6.1 Creating a PE LUN.......................................................................................................................................................... 169
5.6.2 Viewing PE LUNs............................................................................................................................................................. 172

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block Contents

5.6.3 Modifying a PE LUN....................................................................................................................................................... 174

5.6.4 Adding a Port Group...................................................................................................................................................... 175
5.6.5 Removing a Port Group................................................................................................................................................ 175
5.6.6 Modifying Host LUN IDs............................................................................................................................................... 176
5.6.7 Mapping a PE LUN......................................................................................................................................................... 176
5.6.8 Unmapping a PE LUN.................................................................................................................................................... 177
5.6.9 Deleting a PE LUN.......................................................................................................................................................... 178
5.6.10 Viewing VVol LUNs...................................................................................................................................................... 179
5.7 Managing Hosts.................................................................................................................................................................. 180
5.7.1 Viewing Host Information............................................................................................................................................ 180
5.7.2 Viewing Path Details...................................................................................................................................................... 181
5.7.3 Viewing Host LUN IDs................................................................................................................................................... 182
5.7.4 Modifying Host LUN IDs............................................................................................................................................... 183
5.7.5 Adding a Port Group...................................................................................................................................................... 184
5.7.6 Removing a Port Group................................................................................................................................................ 185
5.7.7 Mapping a LUN Group to a Host.............................................................................................................................. 185
5.7.8 Mapping LUNs to a Host.............................................................................................................................................. 188
5.7.9 Unmapping a Host......................................................................................................................................................... 191
5.7.10 Scanning for Hosts....................................................................................................................................................... 192
5.7.11 Adding an Initiator....................................................................................................................................................... 192
5.7.12 Modifying an Initiator................................................................................................................................................. 196
5.7.13 Removing an Initiator................................................................................................................................................. 197
5.7.14 Modifying the Properties of a Host........................................................................................................................ 197
5.7.15 Deleting a Host............................................................................................................................................................. 198
5.8 Managing Initiators........................................................................................................................................................... 199
5.8.1 Creating an Initiator....................................................................................................................................................... 199
5.8.2 Viewing Initiator Information..................................................................................................................................... 203
5.8.3 Modifying an Initiator................................................................................................................................................... 204
5.8.4 Associating an Initiator with a Host......................................................................................................................... 207
5.8.5 Dissociating an Initiator from a Host...................................................................................................................... 207
5.8.6 Deleting an Initiator....................................................................................................................................................... 208
5.9 Managing Host Groups.................................................................................................................................................... 208
5.9.1 Viewing Host Group Information.............................................................................................................................. 208
5.9.2 Viewing Host LUN IDs................................................................................................................................................... 209
5.9.3 Modifying Host LUN IDs............................................................................................................................................... 210
5.9.4 Adding a Port Group...................................................................................................................................................... 211
5.9.5 Removing a Port Group................................................................................................................................................ 211
5.9.6 Mapping a LUN Group to a Host Group................................................................................................................. 212
5.9.7 Unmapping a Host Group............................................................................................................................................ 215
5.9.8 Adding a Host.................................................................................................................................................................. 215
5.9.9 Removing a Host............................................................................................................................................................. 216
5.9.10 Modifying the Properties of a Host Group.......................................................................................................... 217

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block Contents

5.9.11 Deleting a Host Group................................................................................................................................................ 218

5.10 Managing Port Groups................................................................................................................................................... 218
5.10.1 Viewing Port Group Information............................................................................................................................. 218
5.10.2 Adding a Port................................................................................................................................................................. 219
5.10.3 Removing a Port........................................................................................................................................................... 220
5.10.4 Modifying a Port Group............................................................................................................................................. 221
5.10.5 Deleting a Port Group................................................................................................................................................. 222
5.11 Viewing a Mapping View.............................................................................................................................................. 222

6 FAQs....................................................................................................................................... 224
6.1 How Can I Enable Mapping Cancellation Fool-Proofing?.................................................................................... 224
6.2 How Can I Query the iSCSI Target Name of an Ethernet Port on a Storage System?...............................225

A Configuring Basic Storage Services Using the CLI...................................................... 227

B Managing Basic Storage Services Using the CLI..........................................................231
C How to Obtain Help........................................................................................................... 238
C.1 Preparations for Contacting Huawei........................................................................................................................... 238
C.1.1 Collecting Troubleshooting Information................................................................................................................. 238
C.1.2 Making Debugging Preparations...............................................................................................................................238
C.2 How to Use the Document............................................................................................................................................. 239
C.3 How to Obtain Help from Website.............................................................................................................................. 239
C.4 Ways to Contact Huawei................................................................................................................................................. 239

D Glossary.................................................................................................................................240
E Acronyms and Abbreviations............................................................................................255

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 1 Introduction

1 Introduction

This chapter describes the organization of this guide, lists related documentation,
and provides tips for use.

Organization of This Guide

This guide describes how to configure and manage basic storage services using
the graphical user interface (GUI). It is assumed that you are already familiar with
basics of storage systems and networks.
The guide is organized into the following major parts:
● Basic storage service overview
Describes basic concepts, working principles, and application scenarios of
storage systems.
● Planning basic storage services
Describes how to plan storage pools, LUNs, and users.
● Configuring basic storage services
Describes how to configure storage resources, including storage pools, LUNs,
and LUN groups, and how to create mappings so that hosts can use the
storage space provided by storage systems.
● Managing basic storage services
Describes how to manage storage resources, including storage pools, LUNs,
and LUN groups.

Related Documentation
Refer to the following documents when performing certain basic configurations
and subsequent operations:
● Product description
Refer to the product description specific to your product if you want to
understand the market positioning, basic functions, and specifications of the
product.
● Installation guide
Refer to the guide specific to your product when initializing a storage system.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 1 Introduction

● Administrator guide
Refer to the guide specific to your product when planning user roles and
permissions.
● Host connectivity guide
Refer to the guide specific to your product for details on how to configure
host connectivity.
● Command reference
Refer to the guide specific to your product if you want to configure storage
services using the command-line interface (CLI).

Tips
GUIs may vary with product versions and models. The actual GUIs prevail.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

2 Basic Storage Service Overview

This chapter describes basic concepts, basic storage principles, and application
scenarios of storage systems.
2.1 Basic Storage Principles
2.2 Symmetric Active-Active Architecture
2.3 Application Scenarios

2.1 Basic Storage Principles

Storage system uses the RAID 2.0+ and dynamic RAID technologies to achieve
dynamic allocation and expansion of storage resources in storage pools.

2.1.1 Basic Concepts

● RAID
A storage virtualization technology which stores and replicates data in a disk
group (logical disk) consisting of multiple physical disks. The disk group
provides higher storage performance than a single disk and supports data
redundancy. Different RAID levels are available.
● RAID 2.0+ block virtualization
A new type of RAID technology. Block virtualization divides disks into multiple
chunks (CKs) of a fixed size and organizes them into multiple chunk groups
(CKGs). When a disk fails, the disks of the CKG where the CKs in the faulty
disk reside also participate in reconstruction. This significantly increases the
number of disks involved in the reconstruction, improving the data
reconstruction speed.
● CK
Disks are divided into blocks with a fixed size (typically 4 MB). Each block is
assigned a number and constitutes a CK. A CK is the smallest unit of a RAID
group.
● CKG
A logical collection of N+M CKs on different disks. N is the number of data
blocks in a CKG and changes with the number of disks involved. M is the
number of parity blocks in a CKG. A CKG has the properties of a RAID group.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

● RAID columns
Stripe length of each CKG: N+M.
● Dynamic RAID
A new RAID algorithm that dynamically adjusts the number of CKs in CKGs to
ensure system reliability and storage capacity. If a CK is faulty and no CK is
available from disks, the system dynamically reconstructs the original N+M
CKs to (N-1)+M CKs. When an extra SSD is inserted, the system then migrates
data from (N-1)+M CKs to the newly constructed N+M CKs for efficient disk
usage.
● Grain
CKGs are divided into small, fixed-size blocks called grains (the default size of
a grain is 8 KB). Grains are the basic units that constitute a thin LUN.
● Disk domain
A disk domain consists of multiple disks. When a storage pool is created on
DeviceManager, a disk domain is automatically created within the storage
system but is not displayed on DeviceManager. By default, the capacity of a
storage pool is equal to the available capacity of the corresponding disk
domain.
NOTE

You can create disk domains and storage pools on the CLI. For details, see the
command reference specific to your product model and version.
● Storage pool
A storage resource container. The storage resources used by application
servers are all from storage pools.
● Hot spare space
Space used for data reconstruction of faulty blocks in block virtualization.
When a CK is faulty, the system lets a CK of the hot spare space take over and
instructs other CKs in the CKG to perform data reconstruction using the hot
spare space. This ensures data integrity and read/write performance.
● Hot spare policy
A policy that specifies the hot spare capacity of a storage pool. RAID 2.0+
allows all member disks in a storage pool to provide hot spare capacity. For
ease of understanding, the hot spare capacity is expressed in the number of
hot spare disks on DeviceManager.
● Redundancy policy
A policy that specifies whether disk or enclosure redundancy is used. The
redundancy policy of a storage pool cannot be changed once being specified
during storage pool creation.
– Disk redundancy: Chunks in a chunk group come from different SSDs.
This policy enables the system to tolerate a specific number of faulty
disks allowed by the RAID redundancy capacity.
– Enclosure redundancy: Chunks in a chunk group come from different
SSDs and are distributed in different enclosures if possible. In addition,
the number of chunks in each enclosure does not exceed the RAID
redundancy. With this redundancy policy used, the system can tolerate a
single disk enclosure failure without service interruption or data loss.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

● LUN
Storage space in a storage pool is divided into logical units called LUNs. A
host can use storage space provided by LUNs after LUNs are mapped to it.
● LUN group
A collection of multiple LUNs. If the data of an application is stored on
multiple LUNs, you can create a LUN group for these LUNs. Operations on a
LUN group apply to all its member LUNs. A LUN group can contain one or
more LUNs.
● Host
A physical or virtual machine that can access a storage system.
● Host group
A collection of multiple hosts. If an application is deployed on a cluster
consisting of multiple hosts, these hosts will access the data volumes of the
application at the same time. In this case, you can create a host group for
these hosts.
● Port
Endpoint of a connection. For physical connections, ports are physical
interfaces, such as Fibre Channel ports and iSCSI ports.
● Port group
A collection of multiple physical ports. If a port group is specified during the
creation of a mapping, storage resources and application servers in the
mapping communicate with each other using only the ports in the specified
port group.
● Reconstruction
A process of restoring the data saved on a faulty disk to hot spare CKs and
replacing the CKs on the faulty disk with the hot spare CKs. During data
reconstruction, valid data and parity data must be read and processed to
restore the data saved on a faulty disk to hot spare space, thereby ensuring
data security and reliability. Traditional reconstruction technologies allow only
all disks in the same RAID group as the faulty disk to participate in
reconstruction. The RAID 2.0+ technology enables all disks in the same
storage pool as the faulty disk to participate in reconstruction, boosting data
reconstruction speed and shortening data recovery duration.
● Deduplication
Data reduction technology that deletes duplicate data in a storage system to
reduce the capacity required for storing data.
● Data compression
Technology that compresses data without causing data loss, improving the
efficiency in data storage, transfer, and processing.

2.1.2 Basic Storage Principles with Disk Redundancy

In common RAID mode (disk redundancy), CKs are distributed to different disks,
and the system can tolerate disk failures within the RAID redundancy capacity.

2.1.2.1 RAID 2.0+ Block Virtualization Process

SSDs with uneven data storage and heavy loads are potential system bottlenecks.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Storage system uses RAID 2.0+ for fine-grained division of SSDs to evenly
distribute data to all LUNs on each SSD and balance loads.

Process
Figure 2-1 shows the RAID 2.0+ block virtualization process when disk redundancy
is used.

Figure 2-1 Block virtualization process

SSDs CKs CKGs LUNs

……..
……..
……..

CK
CKG
Grain

1. Multiple SSDs form a storage pool.

2. Each SSD is then divided into chunks (CKs) of a fixed size (typically 4 MB) for
logical space management.
3. CKs from different SSDs form chunk groups (CKGs) based on the RAID policy
specified on DeviceManager.
4. CKGs are further divided into grains (typically 8 KB). Grains are mapped to
LUNs for refined management of storage resources.

Advantages
RAID 2.0+ has the following advantages over traditional RAID:

● Balanced service loads for zero hotspots

Even data distribution to all SSDs in a storage pool prevents individual SSDs
from becoming hotspots to lower the SSD failure rate.
● Fast data reconstruction for reduced data loss
Faulty SSDs trigger data reconstruction on all the other SSDs in the storage
pool. This many-to-many reconstruction is rapid and significantly reduces data
vulnerability.
● Total participation for seamless reconstruction
All member SSDs in a storage pool participate in reconstruction, and each
SSD only needs to reconstruct a small amount of data. As a result,
reconstruction does not affect upper-layer applications.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

2.1.2.2 RAID Usage

CKGs in RAID 2.0+ block virtualization have RAID properties. The number of RAID
columns (N+M) is the stripe length of each CKG. N is the number of data columns
in a CKG and changes with the number of CKG disks. M is the number of parity
columns.

M Values
RAID levels determine the values of M. Dynamic RAID reconstruction only changes
the value of N. Table 2-1 describes M values for disk redundancy.

Table 2-1 M values

RAID Level M

RAID 5 1

RAID 6 (default) 2

RAID-TP 3

Number of RAID Columns

For disk redundancy, the number of RAID columns (N+M) is calculated as follows:

● RAID 5
NOTE

In 6.1.2 and later versions, RAID 5 cannot be configured on DeviceManager. To

configure RAID 5, run the create storage_pool name=? disk_list=? raid_level=RAID5
max_raid_member_number=? command to create a RAID 5 storage pool. The
optional parameter max_raid_member_number specifies the maximum number of
member disks in a RAID group. For details, refer to the command reference specific to
your product model and version.
RAID 6 or RAID-TP with higher reliability is recommended.
– For OceanStor Dorado 3000 V6, the value of max_raid_member_number
can be 15 or 25. If the value of max_raid_member_number is not
specified, the maximum number of member disks in a RAID group is 15
by default.
If the value of max_raid_member_number is 15 or not specified:
Number of RAID columns = Min (Number of member disks in the storage
pool – Number of reserved columns, 15)
If the value of max_raid_member_number is 25: Number of RAID
columns = Min (Number of member disks in the storage pool – Number
of reserved columns, 25)
– For OceanStor Dorado 5000 V6/OceanStor Dorado 6000 V6/OceanStor
Dorado 8000 V6/OceanStor Dorado 18000 V6, the value of
max_raid_member_number can be 12 or 25. If the value of
max_raid_member_number is not specified, the maximum number of
member disks in a RAID group is 12 by default.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

If the value of max_raid_member_number is 12 or not specified:

Number of RAID columns = Min (Number of member disks in the storage
pool – Number of reserved columns, 12)
If the value of max_raid_member_number is 25: Number of RAID
columns = Min (Number of member disks in the storage pool – Number
of reserved columns, 25)
● RAID 6 or RAID-TP: Number of RAID columns = Min (Number of member
disks in a storage pool – Number of reserved columns, 25)
Wherein, Number of reserved columns = Max (1, Number of hot spare disks)

NOTE

The methods for calculating the number of RAID columns in the following three scenarios
are slightly different:
● On OceanStor Dorado 5000 V6/OceanStor Dorado 6000 V6, a storage pool spans over
multiple controller enclosures and contains disks from smart disk enclosures.
● On OceanStor Dorado 8000 V6/OceanStor Dorado 18000 V6, eight controllers are
configured without back-end full interconnection, and a storage pool spans over
multiple controller enclosures.
● A storage pool with a single controller enclosure is expanded to span over multiple
controller enclosures.
Number of member disks in a storage pool in the preceding formulas refers to the
number of disks owned by a single controller enclosure for a storage pool.
Example:
For RAID 6 or RAID-TP:
Number of RAID columns = Min [Number of disks owned by a single controller enclosure
for a storage pool – Number of reserved columns/2 (rounded up), 25]
Number of reserved columns = Max (1, Number of hot spare disks)

Example
A storage pool consists of 25 disks with RAID 6 (default value) and a hot spare
policy of Low (1 disk). The number of RAID columns is calculated as follows:
Number of reserved columns = Max (1, Number of hot spare disks) = 1
Number of RAID columns = Min (Number of member disks in a storage pool –
Number of reserved columns, 25) = Min (25 – 1, 25) = 24
The number of RAID columns (N+M) is 24 in this example.

RAID Usage
RAID usage = [(Number of RAID columns – Number of RAID parity columns M)/
Number of RAID columns] x 100%
Example
The number of RAID columns (N+M) from the previous example is 24. The RAID
level is RAID 6, so M is 2. RAID usage is therefore calculated as follows:
RAID usage = [(Number of RAID columns – Number of RAID parity columns M)/
Number of RAID columns] x 100% = [(24 - 2)/24] x 100% = 91.67%
The RAID usage is 91.67%.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

2.1.3 Basic Storage Principles with Enclosure Redundancy

Storage system supports enclosure redundancy (cross-enclosure RAID) to tolerate
the failure of a single disk enclosure, providing higher reliability for core services.

2.1.3.1 Enclosure Redundancy

Context
In common RAID mode (disk redundancy), CKs are distributed to different disks,
and the system can tolerate disk failures within the RAID redundancy capacity.
However, the system cannot tolerate disk enclosure failure.
Core service systems, such as core financial transaction systems, require that
storage systems be able to tolerate disk enclosure failure.
Storage system provides enclosure redundancy to meet such requirements. A
storage pool with enclosure redundancy has the following features:
● With RAID 6 or RAID 10, the system can tolerate a single disk enclosure
failure without service interruption or data loss.
● With RAID-TP, the system can ensure that services are not interrupted and
data is not lost when one disk enclosure fails and then a single disk in
another disk enclosure fails.
● After hot spare reconstruction is completed for a faulty disk, the system can
further tolerate the failure of a single disk enclosure.
● Enclosure redundancy automatically restores after the faulty disk enclosure is
recovered.

Implementation
Enclosure redundancy is implemented based on disk redundancy with additional
concerns about distribution of disks in different enclosures. In this example, the
storage system is configured with four enclosures, each of which has three disks.
Figure 2-2 shows how enclosure redundancy is implemented. CKs in the same
color form a CKG.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Figure 2-2 Implementation of enclosure redundancy

● To ensure service continuity in the event of a single disk enclosure failure, CKs
in each CKG come from different enclosures if possible and the number of CKs
from each enclosure does not exceed the RAID redundancy. For example, with
RAID 6 configured, a maximum of two CKs can be selected from each
enclosure. After an enclosure is faulty, only two copies of data are lost in each
CKG, and the lost data can be restored using the two parity columns, ensuring
service continuity. With RAID-TP configured, a maximum of two CKs can be
selected from each enclosure to ensure that the system can further tolerate
the failure of a single disk after a single disk enclosure failure.
That is, the storage system preferentially allocates blocks across enclosures to
form a CKG, and ensures that no more than two disks in each enclosure are
selected to form a CKG.
● The stripe length of each CKG is reduced by one, that is, the number of RAID
columns is (N+M) = 2 x K - 1, to ensure that the number of RAID data
columns N does not decrease after reconstruction is completed for a single
disk failure and the system can still tolerate the failure of a single enclosure. K
is the number of enclosures (controller enclosures + disk enclosures) that
provide disks for a storage pool. For example, in Figure 2-2, the number of
RAID columns is 7 (2 x 4 – 1). That is, the stripe length of each CKG is 7.

Restrictions
● To use enclosure redundancy, a storage pool must have disks from at least
four enclosures (disk enclosures + controller enclosures), and each enclosure
must provide at least three disks.
– For a 2 U device, disks in a storage pool must come from at least one
controller enclosure and three disk enclosures or at least four disk
enclosures. In addition, each enclosure must provide at least three disks.
– For a 4 U device, disks in a storage pool must come from at least four
disk enclosures, and each disk enclosure must provide at least three disks.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

● The capacity specifications and number of disks in each controller enclosure

and disk enclosure must be the same.
● If disks of different capacity specifications exist, the disks of each capacity
specification must meet the preceding requirements.
● For a storage pool across multiple controller enclosures, the number of
enclosures that provide disks for the storage pool must be the same for each
selected controller enclosure, and disks owned by each controller enclosure
must meet the preceding requirements.
● Only storage pools with RAID 6, RAID-TP (default), or RAID 10 support
enclosure redundancy. If a RAID 6 storage pool has a faulty disk, the system
can tolerate the failure of a single disk enclosure (that houses normal disks)
only after data reconstruction is completed for the faulty disk.
● The disk and enclosure redundancy policies cannot be changed after being
specified during storage pool creation.
● The following smart disk enclosures support enclosure redundancy:
– Smart disk enclosures on a one-level cascading network
● The following SAS disk enclosures support enclosure redundancy:
– SAS disk enclosures on a one-level cascading network
– SAS disk enclosures on a two-level cascading network with forward and
backward connections in redundancy mode.
● OceanStor Dorado 3000 V6 does not support enclosure redundancy.

Single Enclosure Failure

● If more than three disks are configured in a single enclosure, reconstruction is
not performed on the disks in an enclosure that is faulty or powered off. This
ensures that services are not interrupted even when the system capacity
usage is high. After the enclosure is recovered, enclosure redundancy can be
quickly recovered.
● After an enclosure is faulty, new data is still written according to the originally
configured RAID columns and the available capacity is preferentially
guaranteed to avoid service interruption.
● After an enclosure is faulty, more than two disks are selected from a single
enclosure, and the storage pool does not provide enclosure redundancy any
longer.

Redundancy Restoration
After the faulty enclosure is recovered, the background redundancy recovery task
identifies CKGs that do not meet enclosure redundancy requirements and migrates
block data in these CKGs to the recovered enclosure. The number of allocated
columns in a single enclosure is reduced, and enclosure redundancy is recovered.

Redundancy Capability
With the enclosure redundancy policy, a storage pool may provide enclosure
redundancy or disk redundancy capacity, or does not provide any redundancy
capacity.
● Enclosure redundancy

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

A storage pool provides enclosure redundancy when running properly. After a

single disk enclosure is faulty, services are not interrupted and data is not lost.
● Disk redundancy
After an enclosure power failure or multi-disk failure, a storage pool cannot
provide enclosure redundancy any longer and will provide disk redundancy. In
this case, the storage pool can tolerate the failure of disks that do not exceed
the RAID redundancy capability.
After the fault is rectified and the background redundancy recovery task is
completed, enclosure redundancy recovers, which means that the storage pool
can tolerate the failure of a single disk enclosure without interrupting services
or data loss.
● No redundancy
If the number of faulty disks in a storage pool exceeds the RAID redundancy
capability, the storage pool does not provide any redundancy.
NOTE

On DeviceManager, you can perform the following steps to view the redundancy
policy and redundancy capability of a storage pool:
1. Choose System > Storage Pools.
2. Click the name of the storage pool. On the Summary page, check Redundancy
Policy and Redundancy Capability.

2.1.3.2 RAID 2.0+ Block Virtualization Process

Figure 2-3 shows the RAID 2.0+ block virtualization process for enclosure
redundancy.

Figure 2-3 RAID 2.0+ block virtualization

SSD CKG LUN

……..
……..
……..
CK

CKG

Grain

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

1. Multiple SSDs form a storage pool.

Disks in a storage pool must come from at least four enclosures (disk
enclosures + controller enclosures), and each enclosure must provide at least
three disks.
The capacity specifications and number of disks in each controller enclosure
and disk enclosure must be the same.
2. Each SSD is then divided into CKs of a fixed size (typically 4 MB) for logical
space management.
3. CKs form a CKG with a stripe length of N+M based on the RAID policy
configured on DeviceManager. The storage system preferentially allocates
blocks across enclosures to ensure that a CKG selects no more than two disks
from each enclosure.
4. CKGs are further divided into grains (typically 8 KB). Grains are mapped to
LUNs for refined management of storage resources.

2.1.3.3 RAID Usage

CKGs in RAID 2.0+ block virtualization have RAID properties. The number of RAID
columns (N+M) is the stripe length of each CKG. N is the number of data columns
in a CKG and changes with the number of CKG disks. M is the number of parity
columns.

M Values
RAID levels determine the values of M. Table 2-2 lists the values of M for
enclosure redundancy.

Table 2-2 M values

RAID Level M

RAID 6 2

RAID-TP (default) 3

RAID 10 2

Number of RAID Columns

For enclosure redundancy with RAID 6 or RAID-TP, the number of RAID columns
(N+M) is calculated as follows:

Number of RAID columns = Min (Number of member disks in a storage pool –

Number of reserved columns, 2 x K – 1, 25)

Number of reserved columns = Max (1, Number of hot spare disks)

K is the number of enclosures (controller enclosures + disk enclosures) that

provide disks for the storage pool.

Table 2-3 lists the number of RAID columns for some enclosure configurations.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Table 2-3 Number of RAID columns for some enclosures configurations

Number Minimum Number of RAID Number of RAID
of Number of Disksb Columns (RAID 6) Columns (RAID-TP)
Enclosu
resa

4 12 5+2 4+3

5 15 7+2 6+3

6 18 9+2 8+3

……

13 39 23+2 22+3

14 42 23+2 22+3

……

a: Number of enclosures (controller enclosures + disk enclosures) that provide

the disks in a storage pool. Only some examples are provided here. The number
of RAID columns for other enclosure configurations can be calculated in the
same way.
b: Disks in a storage pool must come from at least four enclosures (disk
enclosures + controller enclosures), and each enclosure must provide at least
three disks.

NOTE

The values of K in the preceding formula for calculating the number of RAID columns are
slightly different in the following scenarios:
● On OceanStor Dorado 5000 V6/OceanStor Dorado 6000 V6, a storage pool spans over
multiple controller enclosures and contains disks from smart disk enclosures.
● On OceanStor Dorado 8000 V6/OceanStor Dorado 18000 V6, eight controllers are
configured without back-end full interconnection, and a storage pool spans over
multiple controller enclosures.
● A storage pool with a single controller enclosure is expanded to span over multiple
controller enclosures.
In these scenarios, the value of K is the number of enclosures (controller enclosures + disk
enclosures) that provide disks owned by a single controller enclosure.

For RAID 10, the number of RAID columns (N+M) is 4, wherein the number of
data columns N is 2 and that of parity columns M is 2.

RAID Usage
RAID usage = [(Number of RAID columns – Number of RAID parity columns M)/
Number of RAID columns] x 100%

2.1.4 Dynamic RAID Reconstruction

Data reconstruction is not possible if the number of available member disks in a
disk domain with conventional RAID is less than the number of member disks in a

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

RAID group due to continuous disk faults or disk replacement. Guaranteeing user
data redundancy is impossible without reconstruction.
Storage system overcomes this problem with dynamic RAID reconstruction by CK.
If the total number of available disks in a storage pool is less than the number of
RAID member disks, the system retains the number of parity columns (M) and
reduces the number of data columns (N) during reconstruction. After the
reconstruction, the number of member disks in the RAID group decreases, but the
RAID redundancy level remains unchanged. After the faulty disk is replaced, the
system increases the number of data columns to N based on the number of
available disks in the storage pool. N+M mode is used to write new data and
gradually rebalance data from the fault period.
Example
A storage pool consists of 13 disks with RAID 6 and a hot spare policy of Low (1
disk). The stripe length of CKGs is N+M = 10+2.
RAID 2.0+ block virtualization uses CKs from 12 disks (Disk 0 to Disk 11) to form a
CKG using the stripe structure with N as 10 and M as 2.
If a disk fails, the system excludes the disk IDs of the current CKG with mapping
information and then performs the following operations:
● If new CKs are available from a disk outside of the CKG (for example, only
Disk 4 is faulty and Disk 12 is available), the system directly reconstructs the
failed CK and maintains the RAID level of N+M.

Figure 2-4 Reconstruction with CKs from a disk outside of the CKG

● If external CKs are unavailable (for example, Disk 4 and Disk 12 fail
simultaneously), the CKG is recycled with garbage collection. A new CKG
without the failed disk is formed. The number of RAID columns in the new
CKG decreases to (N-1)+M or less after reconstruction, but M remains
unchanged.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Figure 2-5 Reconstruction without CKs from a disk outside of the CKG

Dynamic RAID reconstruction reduces the number of RAID data disks. The
system addresses faulty CKs by choosing new CKs from the available member
disks for a new CKG to restore the corrupted data. The new CKG disks are all
normal, so data redundancy remains the same. In this example, the original
stripe is 10+2 and the new stripe is 9+2.

2.1.5 Global Garbage Collection

All the data and metadata in a storage pool are written into data blocks using
redirect-on-write (ROW). The system writes data to new storage locations and
marks data in the original locations as junk data. During system running, the
system keeps overwriting data and modifying metadata, generating a great
number of space fragments. Garbage must be collected in a timely manner to
release space for writing service data. If only the garbage collection mechanism in
SSDs is used, system performance will be affected because the triggering time of
garbage collection is uncontrollable.
To solve this issue, Storage system uses global garbage collection. With global
garbage collection, garbage collection triggering is centrally managed by
controllers instead of SSDs. A controller periodically checks the garbage proportion
on each CKG. Upon detecting that the garbage proportion on a CKG exceeds the
threshold, the controller proactively migrates valid data from the CKG to a new
one and delivers the Trim command to SSDs, to notify SSDs that the CKG is no
longer used and can be reclaimed.
Figure 2-6 shows the global garbage collection process.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Figure 2-6 Global garbage collection

Identifies CKGs
with high
garbage
proportions.

Migrates valid data

in ROW mode to
new CKGs.

Reclaims old CKGs.

Valid data
Garbage data
No data

The global garbage collection mechanism reduces the amount of migrated data
during garbage collection, minimizes the impact of garbage collection on system
performance, and ensures system performance stability.

2.1.6 Terms Related to System Capacity

NOTE

● The storage system calculates the capacity as follows: 1 PB = 1,024 TB, 1 TB = 1,024 GB,
1 GB = 1,024 MB, 1 MB = 1,024 KB, 1 KB = 1,024 bytes
● If an effective capacity license is not imported, the system is in traditional capacity
mode. If an effective capacity license is imported, the system is in effective capacity
mode.

Object Term Description

System Total Total capacity of all storage pools in

(traditional the storage system. If no storage pool
capacity exists, -- is displayed.
mode)
Used Used capacity of all storage pools in
the storage system.

Free Free capacity = Capacity – Used

capacity

System Total Total amount of user data that can be

(effective written to the storage system.
capacity
mode) Used Total amount of user data that has
been written to the storage system.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Object Term Description

Free Free effective capacity = Total effective

capacity – Used effective capacity

Storage Pools Total Usable capacity of a storage pool

(Total physical capacity of disks –
Capacity consumed by RAID and
metadata).
NOTE
This capacity is displayed as Available
Capacity in the summary of a storage
pool.

Used Sum of the allocated capacity and

data protection capacity of a storage
pool.

Free Free capacity = Total capacity – Used

capacity

Total Subscribed Total capacity of all LUNs and file

systems in a storage pool.

Used Subscribed Total amount of data that has been

written to all LUNs and file systems in
a storage pool.

Free Subscribed Free subscribed capacity = Total

subscribed capacity – Used subscribed
capacity

Subscribed Capacity (Total subscribed capacity/Total

Rate capacity) of a storage pool, indicating
excess capacity allocation of a storage
pool.

Mapped Capacity Total capacity of mapped LUNs in a

storage pool.
NOTE
Mapped capacity rate = Mapped capacity/
Total capacity

Shared Capacity Total capacity of shared file systems in

a storage pool.
NOTE
Shared capacity rate = Shared capacity/
Total capacity.

Allocated capacity Total capacity allocated to all LUNs

and file systems in a storage pool. In
effective capacity mode, the effective
capacity of the system is consumed.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Object Term Description

Data Protection Total capacity of all LUNs and file

systems for data protection in a
storage pool. In effective capacity
mode, the effective capacity of the
system is consumed.

Thin Space Saving Thin space saving rate = (Total

subscribed capacity – Used subscribed
capacity)/Total subscribed capacity

Data Reduction Ratio Total amount of user data written to

the storage pool divided by the storage
pool's used capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is displayed only after the
deduplication and compression license is
imported.

Data Reduction Ratio Total amount of block data written to

for Block the storage pool divided by the storage
pool's used block capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is displayed only after the
deduplication and compression license is
imported.

Data Reduction Ratio Total amount of file data written to

for File the storage pool divided by the storage
pool's used file capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is displayed only after the
deduplication and compression license is
imported.

Overall Space Saving Space saving ratio of a storage pool.

Ratio (Total subscribed capacity/Used
subscribed capacity) x Data reduction
ratio
NOTE
This parameter is displayed only after the
deduplication and compression license is
imported.

LUNs Total Capacity configured for the LUN.

Allocated Amount of user data written to the

LUN. In effective capacity mode, the
effective capacity of the system is
consumed.

Data Protection Capacity used for data protection on

Capacity the LUN. In effective capacity mode,
the effective capacity of the system is
consumed.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Object Term Description

File Systems Total Capacity configured for the file system.

Allocated Amount of user data written to the file

system. In effective capacity mode, the
effective capacity of the system is
consumed.

Data Protection Capacity used for data protection on

Capacity the file system. In effective capacity
mode, the effective capacity of the
system is consumed.

Available Amount of user data that can be

written to the file system.

Disks Manufacturing Nominal capacity defined by the disk

Capacity manufacturer. 1 PB = 1,000 TB, 1 TB =
1,000 GB, 1 GB = 1,000 MB, 1 MB =
1,000 KB, 1 KB = 1,000 bytes

Disk capacity Converted in the unit of 1024 by the

storage vendor from the
manufacturing capacity of the disk.

Total disk capacity Total manufacture capacity of all disks

on the device.

2.1.7 Scenarios Where the LUN Write Mode Changes to Write

Protection
The default write mode of LUNs in a storage system is write back. However, the
write mode will change to write protection if any of the faults listed in Table 2-4
occurs.

NOTE

● Write back: A caching technique in which the completion of a write request is signaled
as soon as the data is in cache, and actual writing to non-volatile media occurs at a
later time.
● Write protection: Data writing to storage systems is prohibited.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Table 2-4 Scenarios where the write mode of LUNs changes to write protection
Malfunction Scenario Impact and
Type Recommended Action

Backup battery ● Dual-controller storage device: ● Impact

units (BBUs) on If two BBUs malfunction and The write mode of all
a controller an alarm is generated, the LUNs belonging to
enclosure write mode of LUNs changes the controller
malfunction. from write back to write enclosure changes to
protection. write protection.
● Four-controller storage device: ● Recommended action
If four BBUs malfunction and – Verify that the
an alarm is generated, the BBUs are properly
write mode of LUNs changes installed.
from write back to write
protection. – Check whether the
BBUs break down.
If the BBUs break
down, replace
them.
– Check whether the
BBUs have
sufficient power. If
the BBUs have
insufficient power,
wait until the BBUs
are fully charged.

The built-in ● Dual-controller storage device: ● Impact

coffer disks of If the built-in coffer disks of The write mode of all
multiple both controllers break down, LUNs belonging to
controllers the write mode of LUNs the controller
malfunction. changes from write back to enclosure changes to
write protection. write protection.
● Four-controller storage device: ● Recommended action
If all coffer disks of controllers Check whether the
A and B or controllers C and D built-in coffer disks of
break down, the write mode controllers are faulty.
of LUNs changes from write If the coffer disks are
back to write protection. faulty, replace them.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Malfunction Scenario Impact and

Type Recommended Action

Controllers LUNs stay in write back mode for ● Impact

malfunction. the write back hold time (192 The write mode of all
hours by default) if only one LUNs belonging to
controller on a storage system is the controller
properly working. If faults are not enclosure changes to
rectified within this period, the write protection if the
write mode of the LUNs changes fault persists for more
from write back to write than the write back
protection. hold time.
● Recommended action
– Replace the faulty
controller at off-
peak hours within
the write back hold
time.
– If a spare part is
unavailable during
the write back hold
time, you can
extend the hold
time properly after
assessing risks to
prevent write
protection from
adversely affecting
services.

The capacity of An alarm is generated, indicating ● Impact

a storage pool is that the capacity of a storage The write mode of
used up. pool is used up. LUNs changes to
write protection.
● Recommended action
Expand the storage
pool.

2.2 Symmetric Active-Active Architecture

The storage system uses a symmetric active-active architecture. This architecture
balances loads, data volumes, and hotspots by using intelligent distribution
algorithms, intelligent front-end balancing, global caches, and global storage
pools.

2.2.1 Intelligent Balancing Architecture

The storage system uses the global cache and global storage pools. Data written
to the cache is evenly distributed to all controllers. Data written to a storage pool
is evenly distributed to all its member SSDs.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

The storage system is divided into multiple vNodes. Each vNode corresponds to a
group of CPU and memory resources. For example, each controller in OceanStor
Dorado 18000 V6 has four CPUs, and each CPU belongs to a vNode. In this way,
CPU resource scheduling is reduced, improving CPU usage.

Figure 2-7 Intelligent balancing architecture

Intelligent Balancing Algorithm

The storage system uses an intelligent balancing algorithm to balance host I/Os
on vNodes.

1. The storage system calculates the hash value (shard) of a host I/O based on
its logical block addressing (LBA) and the hash factor, that is:
Shard = hash (I/O LBA, hash factor)
2. The intelligent distribution algorithm distributes data to different vNodes
based on shard values, ensuring that host data to LUNs is evenly distributed
to all vNodes.

Intelligent Front-End Balancing

Huawei-developed multipathing software UltraPath, front-end interconnect I/O
modules (FIMs), and controllers negotiate the same hash method to implement
intelligent distribution of read and write requests and ensure load balancing
between vNodes.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

● When Huawei UltraPath is used, UltraPath works closely with the storage
system. UltraPath uses an intelligent distribution algorithm to calculate the
shard value of each I/O, searches for the vNode in the storage system based
on the shard value, and distributes the I/O to the front-end link corresponding
to the vNode. This prevents data forwarding between vNodes.
● OceanStor Dorado 8000 V6 and 18000 V6 use FIMs. FIMs use the same
intelligent distribution algorithm as UltraPath to distribute I/Os to each
controller.
● If neither UltraPath nor the FIM is used, the storage system calculates the
shard values upon reception of host I/Os and then forwards the I/Os to the
corresponding vNodes based on the shard values for later processing.

Intelligent Balancing in the Global Cache

Intelligent balancing is implemented in the global cache to balance data volumes
and data hotspots.
● Each vNode has a cache instance. After receiving data from a host, a vNode
writes the data to its cache instance and the system selects another vNode as
the mirror vNode based on the system balancing policy.
● If a controller is faulty, the system redistributes data on vNodes to balance
the amount of data in the cache of each vNode.

Intelligent Balancing in the Global Storage Pool

Intelligent balancing is implemented in the global storage pool to balance data
volumes and data hotspots on member SSDs.
● When processing a write request delivered by the vNode, the storage pool
writes the data to a chunk group.
● The chunks in the chunk group are selected from all of the SSDs in the
storage pool based on the load balancing algorithm to ensure that data is
evenly distributed on all SSDs.

2.2.2 Simplified Resource Planning

The intelligent balancing architecture with multi-level intelligent balancing
algorithms balances service loads and data in the entire storage system.
Customers only need to consider the total storage capacity and performance
requirements of the storage system when planning resources as:
● Data written by hosts to a storage system is evenly distributed on front-end
links.
● Data volumes received by the global write cache are balanced, and data
hotspots are evenly distributed on all vNodes.
● The data and service pressure are balanced on SSDs in a storage pool.

2.3 Application Scenarios

Storage systems are dedicated to medium- and large-sized data centers of
enterprises. They provide storage resources for storage of critical services, storage
for virtual environments, and virtual desktop services.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Storage of Critical Services

Storage system boasts the innovative flash-oriented software architecture, leading
hardware specifications, and 100% component redundancy. These advantages
enable the storage systems to provide unparalleled levels of performance,
consistently low latency, and 24/7 services for critical service storage. In addition,
features such as HyperSnap, SmartDedupe, and SmartCompression reduce
duplicate data, save storage space, and cut down the total cost of ownership
(TCO) without any loss of performance. These features are well suited for data
processing of service systems such as OLTP/OLAP databases and HPC.

Figure 2-8 Storage of critical services

Linux/UNIX/Windows Oracle SQL Server
DB2 database
/VMware server database database

... ...

Networking

OceanStor Dorado V6

Storage for Virtual Environments

Storage system incorporates server virtualization optimization technologies such
as vStorage APIs for Array Integration (VAAI), VMware vStorage APIs for Storage
Awareness (VASA), and Site Recovery Manager (SRM). It also employs numerous
key technologies in virtual machines (VMs) to deploy VMs fast, enhances VMs'
bearing capability and operation efficiency, and streamlines storage management
in virtual environments, removing the worry of complicated storage systems in
virtual environments.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Figure 2-9 Storage for virtual environments

Production center Disaster recovery center

LAN/WAN
Management Management
server server

VM server cluster VM server cluster

Virtualization layer Virtualization layer

ESX server cluster ESX server cluster

OceanStor Dorado V6 series storage systems OceanStor Dorado V6 series storage systems

Virtual Desktop Service

Storage system can easily meet large-scale virtual desktop deployment and
performance requirements while reducing TCO with minimal SSDs in comparison
to traditional storage systems. In addition, storage system provides deduplication
and compression to reduce duplicate data, saves storage space, and maximizes
ROI. Performance-lossless snapshots and remote replication of storage system
improve data backup and disaster recovery capabilities without affecting normal
use of virtual desktops.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 2 Basic Storage Service Overview

Figure 2-10 Virtual desktop service

VMware XenServer Hyper-V

Networking

OceanStor Dorado V6

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 3 Planning Basic Storage Services

3 Planning Basic Storage Services

This chapter describes how to plan storage resources and management user
accounts to facilitate subsequent configurations and management.
3.1 Planning Storage Resources
3.2 Planning Management User Accounts

3.1 Planning Storage Resources

This section describes how to properly plan storage resources to better meet the
service needs.

3.1.1 Planning the Available Capacity

The available capacity of a storage system must be properly planned to ensure
sufficient capacity for service data.

For details about the available capacity and purchased capacity, contact your local
Huawei representative office or Huawei authorized distributor.

When planning the available capacity, you must consider the nominal disk
capacity, hot spare capacity, and RAID usage.

● Nominal disk capacity

The disk capacity defined by disk manufacturers is different from that
calculated by operating systems. As a result, the nominal capacity of a disk is
different from that displayed in the operating system.
– Disk capacity defined by disk manufacturers: 1 GB = 1,000 MB, 1 MB =
1,000 KB, 1 KB = 1,000 bytes
– Disk capacity calculated by operating systems: 1 GB = 1,024 MB, 1 MB =
1,024 KB, 1 KB = 1,024 bytes
● Hot spare capacity
The storage system provides hot spare space to take over data from any failed
disk.
● RAID usage
The capacity used by parity data varies with the RAID level.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 3 Planning Basic Storage Services

The evaluation results of the local Huawei representative office or Huawei

authorized distributor take precedence over the considerations in this section.

3.1.2 Planning Storage Pools

Storage pools are containers of storage resources. The storage resources used by
application servers are all from storage pools. Storage pools must be properly
planned for better storage utilization.

Planning Disk Types

Disks can be classified into self-encrypting disks (SEDs) and non-encrypting disks.
They cannot exist in the same storage pool. SEDs are not sold in the Chinese
mainland.
● SED: When data is written into or read from an SED, the data is encrypted or
decrypted using the hardware circuits and internal encryption key of the SED.
Before using SEDs to create a disk domain, you must configure the key
service. For details, see the disk encryption user guide specific to your product
model and version.
● Non-encrypting disk: does not support encryption.

Planning Redundancy Policies

● The storage system supports disk redundancy and enclosure redundancy.
– Disk redundancy: Chunks in a chunk group come from different SSDs.
This policy enables the system to tolerate a specific number of faulty
disks allowed by the RAID redundancy capacity.
– Enclosure redundancy: Chunks in a chunk group come from different
SSDs and are distributed in different enclosures if possible. In addition,
the number of chunks in each enclosure does not exceed the RAID
redundancy. With this redundancy policy used, the system can tolerate a
single disk enclosure failure without service interruption or data loss.
● The disk and enclosure redundancy policies cannot be changed after being
specified during storage pool creation.
● Disk redundancy delivers equal or higher RAID usage as compared with
enclosure redundancy while enclosure redundancy provides higher reliability.
– RAID usage: For the same RAID level, the RAID usage of disk redundancy
is greater than or equal to that of enclosure redundancy.
Example: A storage system has four disk enclosures, each of which
contains five disks. For storage pools with the same hot spare policy Low
(1 disk) and RAID policy RAID-TP but different redundancy policies, the
RAID usage is as follows:
For disk redundancy, Number of RAID columns = 19, RAID usage = [(19 –
3) / 19] x 100% = 84.21%
For enclosure redundancy, Number of RAID columns = 7, RAID usage is =
[(7 – 3) / 7] x 100% = 57.14%.
– Reliability: Enclosure redundancy can tolerate an enclosure failure while
disk redundancy cannot. Enclosure redundancy provides higher reliability
than disk redundancy.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 3 Planning Basic Storage Services

Planning RAID Policies

● Planning RAID policies for disk redundancy
Storage system uses dynamic RAID for redundancy and provides different
levels of protection based on the number of parity bits in a RAID group. Table
3-1 describes RAID 5, RAID 6, and RAID-TP provided by storage systems when
hot spare space is not considered.

Table 3-1 RAID levels

RAID Number Redundancy and Data Recovery Maximum
Level of Capability Number of
Parity Allowed
Bits Faulty Disks

RAID 5 1 Relatively high. Parity data is 1

distributed on different chunks. In
each chunk group, the parity data
occupies the space of one chunk.
RAID 5 is able to tolerate the failure
on only one chunk. If two or more
chunks fail, RAID 5 protection can no
longer be provided.

RAID 6 2 High. Parity data is distributed on 2

(default different chunks. In each chunk
) group, the parity data occupies the
space of two chunks. RAID 6 is able
to tolerate simultaneous failures on
two chunks. If three or more chunks
fail, RAID 6 protection can no longer
be provided.

RAID- 3 High. Parity data is distributed on 3

TP different chunks. In each chunk
group, the parity data occupies the
space of three chunks. RAID-TP is
able to tolerate simultaneous failures
on three chunks. If four or more
chunks fail, RAID-TP protection can
no longer be provided.

NOTE

In 6.1.2 and later versions, RAID 5 cannot be configured on DeviceManager. To

configure RAID 5, run the create storage_pool name=? disk_list=? raid_level=RAID5
max_raid_member_number=? command to create a RAID 5 storage pool. The
optional parameter max_raid_member_number specifies the maximum number of
member disks in a RAID group. For details, refer to the command reference specific to
your product model and version.
RAID 6 or RAID-TP with higher reliability is recommended.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 3 Planning Basic Storage Services

The performance delivered by RAID 5, RAID 6, and RAID-TP slightly decreases

in sequence as redundancy increases. For different I/O models (random/
sequential, read/write), the same RAID level delivers:
– The same performance for random reads and sequential reads.
– Better performance for sequential writes than that for random writes.
Plan the most suitable RAID level based on site requirements, with
performance, space efficiency, and reliability considered.
You can configure RAID policies according to the following rules:
– For critical service systems, such as billing systems of operators and class-
A financial online transaction systems, you are advised to configure RAID-
TP.
– For non-critical service systems, you are advised to configure RAID 6 or
RAID 5.
● Planning RAID policies for enclosure redundancy
With enclosure redundancy, the storage system provides RAID 6 and RAID-TP.
Table 3-2 describes RAID 6, RAID-TP, and RAID 10 provided by storage
systems when hot spare space is not considered.

Table 3-2 RAID levels

RAID Number of Redundancy and Data Recovery Capability

Level Parity Bits

RAID 6 2 High. Parity data is distributed on different

chunks. In each chunk group, the parity data
occupies the space of two chunks. RAID 6 is able
to tolerate simultaneous failures on two chunks.
If three or more chunks fail, RAID 6 protection
can no longer be provided.

RAID-TP 3 High. Parity data is distributed on different

(default) chunks. In each chunk group, the parity data
occupies the space of three chunks. RAID-TP is
able to tolerate simultaneous failures on three
chunks. If four or more chunks fail, RAID-TP
protection can no longer be provided.

RAID 10 2 High. Parity data is distributed on different

chunks. In each chunk group, the parity data
occupies the space of two chunks. RAID 10 is
able to tolerate simultaneous failures on two
chunks. If three or more chunks fail, RAID 10
protection can no longer be provided. The
number of chunks in a chunk group is fixed to 4.

NOTE

RAID 10 applies to 6.1.2 and later versions.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 3 Planning Basic Storage Services

Planning Hot Spare Policies

Hot spare policies None, Low (1 disk) (default for a new storage pool), High (2
disks), Custom (3 disks), Custom (4 disks), Custom (5 disks), Custom (6
disks), Custom (7 disks), and Custom (8 disks) are available.
NOTE

● RAID 2.0+ allows all member disks in a storage pool to provide hot spare capacity. For
ease of understanding, the hot spare capacity is expressed in the number of hot spare
disks on DeviceManager.
● Even if the hot spare space is used up, the system can use the free space of the storage
pool to reconstruct data, ensuring storage system reliability.

Storage Pool Overcommitment Ratio Planning

Because the storage system uses thin LUNs and thin file systems, it dynamically
allocates storage resources to the LUNs and file systems based on the actual
capacity used by hosts instead of allocating all capacity at a time. As a result, the
total capacity of the LUNs and file systems may exceed the total capacity of the
storage pool.
If the capacity of the LUNs and file systems is not properly planned, the total
configured capacity may be much greater than the actual total capacity of the
storage pool. As the service volume increases, the storage pool space may be
gradually exhausted. If capacity expansion is not performed in time, services will
be affected.
The storage pool overcommitment ratio is to limit the total capacity of LUNs and
file systems to a specified percentage of the storage pool capacity when they are
created. This prevents the total LUN and file system capacity from greatly
exceeding the actual total capacity of the storage pool.
When creating or modifying a storage pool, you can run CLI commands to set the
overcommitment ratio.
● Creating a storage pool
create storage_pool name=? disk_list=? [ raid_level=? | full_threshold=? | used_up_threshold=? |
pool_id=? | usage_type=? | block_size=? | description=? | provisioning_limit_switch=?
[ provisioning_limit=? ] | protection_low_threshold=? | protection_high_threshold=? |
automatic_deletion_switch=? | controller_enclosure_list=? | hotspare_strategy=? |
disk_encryption_switch=? | max_raid_member_number=? | redundancy_strategy=? ]

● Modifying a storage pool

change storage_pool general { pool_id=? | pool_name=? } { name=? | full_threshold=? |
used_up_threshold=? | provisioning_limit_switch=? | provisioning_limit=? |
protection_low_threshold=? | protection_high_threshold=? | automatic_deletion_switch=? |
performance_layer_capacity=? } * [ description=? | clear_description=? ]

In the commands:
● provisioning_limit_switch indicates whether to enable the overcommitment
ratio of the storage pool. Possible values are off and on. The default value is
off, indicating that the system does not limit the ratio of the total LUN and
file system capacity to the total storage pool capacity.
● provisioning_limit indicates the upper limit for the percentage of the total
LUN and file system capacity to the total storage pool capacity. That is,
provisioning_limit = (Total capacity of LUNs and file systems/Total capacity
of the storage pool) x 100. For example, provisioning_limit=120 indicates

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 3 Planning Basic Storage Services

that the total LUN and file system capacity can be 120% of the total storage
pool capacity.
– When a LUN or file system is created, the system determines whether
[(Capacity of the new LUN or file system + Existing capacity)/Total
capacity of the storage pool] x 100 exceeds the specified storage pool
overcommitment ratio. If not, the creation is successful. If yes, the
creation fails.
– When the capacity of a LUN or file system is expanded, the system
determines whether [(Capacity added to the LUN or file system + Existing
capacity)/Total capacity of the storage pool] x 100 exceeds the specified
storage pool overcommitment ratio. If not, the expansion is successful. If
yes, the expansion fails.
– When the storage pool overcommitment ratio is modified, the system
only checks the parameter validity and does not check the capacity. For
example, if the total capacity of LUNs and file systems has reached 130%
of the total storage pool capacity and the current overcommitment ratio
is provisioning_limit=150, you can still change provisioning_limit to 120
to limit later new or expanded LUNs and file systems.
– The provisioning_limit field is valid only when
provisioning_limit_switch is set to on.
NOTE

● For versions earlier than 6.1.3, the storage pool overcommitment ratio takes effect only
for LUNs.
● For 6.1.3 and later versions, the storage pool overcommitment ratio takes effect for both
LUNs and file systems.
● The Provisioning Limit Switch and Provisioning Limit fields in the show storage_pool
general pool_id=? command output indicate the enabling status and configured value
of the overcommitment ratio.
● For details on this command, refer to the Command Reference.

Storage Pool Configuration Rules

NOTE

For details about storage pool specifications, visit Specifications Query.

● When a storage pool is created on DeviceManager, a disk domain is
automatically created within the storage system but is not displayed on
DeviceManager. By default, the capacity of a storage pool is equal to the
available capacity of the corresponding disk domain.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 3 Planning Basic Storage Services

NOTE

● In CLI mode, you can run the create disk_domain name=? disk_list=? and create
storage_pool name=? disk_list=? commands to create a disk domain and a
storage pool, respectively.
● If you run the create disk_domain name=? disk_list=? command to create a disk
domain, the default redundancy policy is disk redundancy. If you want to create a
storage pool with enclosure redundancy, add redundancy_strategy=enclosure in
the command to create a disk domain.
● In CLI mode, you can also directly run the create storage_pool name=? disk_list=?
command to create a storage pool. After a storage pool is created, the system
automatically creates the corresponding disk domain.
● This document describes how to configure storage services on the GUI. For details
about commands, refer to the command reference specific to your product model
and version.
● A storage system supports one or more storage pools.
– During the initial configuration of a storage system, you can configure
that all disks constitute a unique storage pool. After this configuration
applies, you do not need to manually create any storage pool.
NOTE

For details about how to initialize a storage system, see "Logging In and Starting
Initialization" in the initialization guide specific to your product model and
version.
– You can manually create one or more storage pools. DeviceManager
automatically selects appropriate disks to create a storage pool.
Alternatively, you can select desired disks to create a storage pool.
● With disk redundancy, a single storage pool requires at least eight normal
member disks. The minimum number of disks required for creating a storage
pool that spans multiple controller enclosures is calculated as follows:
Minimum number of disks = 8 x Number of controller enclosures that the
storage pool spans

● With enclosure redundancy, disks in a storage pool must come from at least
four enclosures (disk enclosures + controller enclosures), and each enclosure
must provide at least three disks. For a 4 U device, the minimum number of
disks required for creating a storage pool that spans multiple controller
enclosures is calculated as follows:
– With back-end full interconnection: Minimum number of disks = 8 x
Number of controller enclosures that the storage pool spans
– Without back-end full interconnection: Minimum number of disks = 12 x
Number of controller enclosures that the storage pool spans

3.1.3 Planning LUNs

Block storage uses LUNs as basic units for services. All LUNs on storage system are
thin LUNs.

Planning LUN Parameters

Table 3-3 lists the recommended settings for LUN parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 3 Planning Basic Storage Services

Table 3-3 LUN parameters

Parameter Recommendation

Name User-defined

Description User-defined

Storage Pool Select the storage pool to which the LUN belongs.

Capacity Configure the capacity based on service requirements.

This is the maximum capacity for each thin LUN. The total
for dynamic allocation of storage resources for each thin
LUN must not exceed this value.
The maximum capacity of the LUN must not exceed system
specifications.

Quantity User-defined

Start Number User-defined

NOTE
This parameter is displayed only when Quantity is greater than 1
and Advanced is selected.

Map to Host Select the host for mapping with your created LUN.

Host LUN ID Select a method for assignment of host LUN IDs.

● Automatic: The system assigns a host LUN ID to each
LUN mapped to a host.
● Manual: You can manually set the host LUN ID.

Application Type Select an application type based on the service I/O model.
Preset application types are provided for typical applications.
In block service scenarios, possible options are Default,
Oracle_OLAP, Oracle_OLTP, Oracle_OLAP&OLTP,
SQL_Server_OLAP, SQL_Server_OLTP,
SQL_Server_OLAP&OLTP, SAP_HANA, Vmware_VDI,
Hyper-V_VDI, Others, and FusionAccess_VDI.
NOTE
● The preset application types specify the application request sizes.
When SmartCompression and SmartDedupe licenses are
imported to the system, the preset application types also display
whether SmartCompression and SmartDedupe are enabled. For
details, see SmartDedupe and SmartCompression Feature Guide
for Block of the desired product model and version.
● After you have set an application type for a LUN, you are unable
to change it in follow-up operations.
● If the application type configured for a LUN does not match the
actual I/O model, the LUN performance may deteriorate.
● If none of the preset application types matches the actual I/O
model, you can run the create lun_workload_type general
command to create one. For details on this command, refer to
the command reference.
● Only 6.1.3 and later versions support Others.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 3 Planning Basic Storage Services

Planning Value-Added Features

For details about supported value-added features, visit Specifications Query.
For details about how to plan value-added features, see the corresponding feature
guides. For example, to plan HyperSnap, see the HyperSnap Feature Guide for
Block specific to your product model.

3.2 Planning Management User Accounts

To minimize the risk of human errors compromising storage system stability and
service data security, the storage system defines user roles to determine user
permission and scope of permission.
Plan the roles of local user accounts carefully and assign the accounts to the
corresponding users.
For details about user roles, see the administrator guide corresponding to your
product model and version.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

This chapter describes how to configure the storage system to divide the storage
space into LUNs and map them to application servers so that the application
servers can read and write the storage space.
4.1 Configuration Process
4.2 Check Before Configuration
4.3 Logging In to DeviceManager
4.4 Creating a Storage Pool
4.5 Creating a LUN
4.6 (Optional) Creating a LUN Group
4.7 Creating a Host
4.8 (Optional) Creating a Host Group
4.9 (Optional) Creating a Port Group
4.10 Creating a Mapping
4.11 Configuring the Host Connectivity
4.12 Using the Storage Space on an Application Server
4.13 More Configuration Scenarios

4.1 Configuration Process

Figure 4-1 shows the process for configuring the storage space.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Figure 4-1 Process for configuring the storage space

Start

Perform check before

configuration.
1. Prepare for configuration.

Log in to DeviceManager.

Create a storage pool.

2. Create storage space. Create a LUN.

If the data of an application is stored on multiple

Create a LUN group. LUNs, you can create a LUN group for these LUNs
for easier management.

Create a host.

If an application is deployed on a cluster consisting

of multiple hosts, these hosts will access the data
Create a host group. volumes of the application at the same time. In
this case, you can create a host group for these
hosts.
If specific ports are required for the
Create a port group. communication between a storage system and an
3. Create a mapping and application server, you can create a port group.
configure host connectivity.
Create a mapping.

Configure connectivity.

Use the storage space on

an application server.

End

Mandatory Optional

NOTE

The above flowchart shows a common configuration process. DeviceManager uses a brand-
new interface interaction design, which simplifies resource allocation and supports various
flexible configurations of mappings. You can select a proper one based on service
requirements.

4.2 Check Before Configuration

Check the software installation and initial configuration to ensure that site
requirements are met.

Checking Licenses
Log in to DeviceManager. Check whether licenses have been imported and contain
the same basic or value-added features you purchased.

● If licenses have not been imported, import them by following instructions in

"Logging In and Starting Initialization" in the initialization guide.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

● If the licenses are different from those you purchased, contact technical
support.
● If an effective capacity license has been purchased, ensure that the effective
capacity meets actual service requirements.

Checking Software Installation

Check whether the required software is properly installed on the storage system
and application server.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Table 4-1 Software installation checklist

Check Item Description

(Optional) iSCSI initiator ● Windows

NOTE On the Windows task bar, check whether
The iSCSI initiators are required Microsoft iSCSI Initiator exists in the All
only for iSCSI connections. Programs list. If yes, an iSCSI initiator is
installed on the application server.
● SUSE
On a SUSE application server, run the rpm -
qa |grep iscsi command. If the iSCSI
initiator information is displayed, an iSCSI
initiator is installed on the application
server.
● Red Hat
On a Red Hat application server, run the
rpm -qa | grep iscsi command. If the iSCSI
initiator information is displayed, an iSCSI
initiator is installed on the application
server.
● Solaris
On a Solaris application server, run the
pkginfo | grep iscsi command. If the iSCSI
initiator information is displayed, an iSCSI
initiator is installed on the application
server.
● HP-UX
On an HP-UX application server, run the
swlist iSCSI-00 command. If the iSCSI
initiator information is displayed, an iSCSI
initiator is installed on the application
server.
● VMware
For VMware ESXi 4.1 and earlier versions,
an iSCSI adapter already exists in a storage
adapter. You can directly enable the iSCSI
adapter. For VMware ESXi 5.0 and later
versions, you must add an iSCSI adapter on
the Storage Adapters page first.
For details about installing an iSCSI initiator,
refer to "Configuring Connectivity" in Host
Connectivity Guide.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Check Item Description

(Optional) UltraPath For details about installing UltraPath, refer to

NOTE the OceanStor UltraPath for XXX User Guide.
● Multipathing software is
XXX represents a specific operating system, for
required when redundant example, Windows.
paths exist between the NOTE
storage system and the You can log in to Huawei's technical support website
application server. at https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/. In the
● UltraPath is Huawei- search box, enter UltraPath, and select a path from
developed multipathing the paths that are automatically displayed to go to
software. the document page. Then click the Software
Download tab, and search for and download your
desired software files.

Checking Security Settings

Check Item Description

(Recommended) iSCSI initiator Run the show tgt_switch ini_white_list

whitelist command in developer mode to check
whether the initiator whitelist switch is on.
If the switch is off, you are advised to run the
change tgt_switch ini_white_list switch=on
command to turn it on. After this switch is
turned on, iSCSI connections can be
established only for manually created
initiators. For details about this command, see
the Advanced O&M Command Reference.
NOTE
● You can run the show initiator command to
view created initiators.
● After a host and a storage system are physically
connected, the storage system with the initiator
whitelist function enabled automatically checks
whether the initiators are manually created
according to their IQNs. If yes, the storage
system allows the establishment of iSCSI
connections. If no, the storage system does not
allow the establishment of iSCSI connections. In
this case, you need to manually create initiators,
reconnect cables, and set up iSCSI connections.

Checking Network Connection Status

Table 4-2 lists the check items and provides the check methods.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Table 4-2 Network connection status checklist

Category Check Item Check Method

Connection Check whether the In the CLI of the maintenance terminal,

between the management network run ping ip (if IPv4 is used) or ping -6
maintenance port on the storage ip (if IPv6 is used), where ip indicates
terminal and system is the IP address of the management
the storage communicating with network port.
system the maintenance ● If the maintenance terminal receives
terminal properly. data packets from the management
network port, this indicates that the
communication between the
storage system and maintenance
terminal is normal.
● If the maintenance terminal receives
no data packets from the
management network port, change
the IP address of the management
network port and try again.

Connection When an iSCSI front- In the CLI of the application server, run
between the end port on the ping ip (if IPv4 is used) or ping -6 ip
storage storage system is (if IPv6 is used), where ip indicates the
system and used for connection, IP address of the iSCSI front-end port.
the check whether the ● If the application server receives
application iSCSI front-end port is data packets from the iSCSI front-
server (using communicating with end port, this indicates that the
a Windows the service network communication between the
application port on the storage system and application
server as an application server server is normal.
example) properly.
● If the application server receives no
data packets from the iSCSI front-
end port, replace the network cable,
change the IP address of the iSCSI
front-end port, or add a route
between the iSCSI front-end port
and service network port, and try
again.
For details on how to change the IP
address of an iSCSI front-end port
or add a route between an iSCSI
front-end port and a service
network port, see the
DeviceManager online help.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Category Check Item Check Method

When a Fibre Channel If the rates are different, change the

front-end port on the rate of the Fibre Channel front-end
storage system is port.
used for connection,
check whether the
rate of the Fibre
Channel front-end
port is the same as
that of the Fibre
Channel host bus
adapter (HBA) on the
application server.

When a Fibre Channel If the modes are different, change the

front-end port on the mode of the Fibre Channel front-end
storage system is port.
used for connection,
check whether the
mode of the Fibre
Channel front-end
port is the same as
that of the Fibre
Channel HBA on the
application server.

Connection To ensure that a link Huawei CE series switches are used as

between the can be recovered as an example. You can run the display
storage soon as possible after stp global command and check the
system and a fault occurs, you are Edged port default field in the
switches (if advised to configure command output to determine
switches are the ports on the whether the port is configured as an
used) switches connected to edge port. If the value is Enabled, the
the storage system as port is configured as an edge port. If
edge ports. the value is Disabled, the port is
NOTE configured as a non-edge port.
The commands for
configuring a switch
port as an edge port
vary according to the
switch vendor. For
details, see the product
documentation of the
corresponding switch or
consult the technical
support of the
corresponding vendor.
Huawei CE series
switches are used as an
example. You can run
the stp edged-port
enable command to
configure a port as an
edge port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

4.3 Logging In to DeviceManager

DeviceManager is a device management program developed by Huawei.
DeviceManager has been loaded to a storage system before delivery. You can log
in to DeviceManager to manage storage resources in a centralized manner.

For details about how to log in to DeviceManager, see "Logging In to

DeviceManager" in the initialization guide specific to your product model and
version.

4.4 Creating a Storage Pool

4.4.1 Creating a Storage Pool (Applicable to 6.1.0)

This section describes how to create a storage pool from which application servers
can use storage space.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Storage Pools.

Step 2 Click Create.

The Create Storage Pool page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

NOTE

The screenshot is for reference only and the actual GUI may vary.

Step 3 Set the storage pool parameters.

Table 4-3 describes the parameters.

Table 4-3 Storage pool parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the storage pool.

[Value range]
● The name must be unique.
● The name contains only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Description Description of the storage pool.

Data Encryption Indicates whether to enable data encryption for all self-
encrypting disks (SEDs) in the storage pool.
● If this function is disabled, the storage pool is not
encrypted.
● If this function is enabled, the storage pool is encrypted.
Ensure that you select only SEDs.
NOTE
If this function is enabled, the system automatically checks whether
the key service has been configured. If the key service has not been
configured, the system will prompt you to configure the key service.
For details, see the Disk Encryption User Guide specific to your
product model and version.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Redundancy Redundancy policy of the storage pool. Possible options are

Policy Disk redundancy and Enclosure redundancy.
● Disk redundancy: Chunks in a chunk group come from
different SSDs. With this redundancy policy used, the
system can tolerate disk failures within the RAID
redundancy.
● Enclosure redundancy: Chunks in a chunk group come
from different SSDs and are distributed in different
enclosures. In addition, the number of chunk columns in
each enclosure does not exceed the RAID redundancy.
With this redundancy policy used, the system can tolerate
a single disk enclosure failure without service
interruption and data loss.
NOTE
● The redundancy policy of a storage pool cannot be changed
once being specified during storage pool creation.
● If Enclosure redundancy is selected, select the controller
enclosures and disk enclosures to which the storage pool
belongs.
[Default value]
Disk redundancy

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

RAID Policy RAID policy of the storage pool. Dynamic RAID is used.
Dynamic RAID reconstruction uses the erasure coding (EC)
algorithm, which dynamically adjusts the number of chunks
in a chunk group under all-SSD configurations to ensure
system reliability and capacity. If a chunk is faulty and no
chunk is available from disks outside the storage pool, the
system dynamically reconstructs the original N+M chunks to
(N-1)+M chunks. When a new SSD is inserted, the system
migrates data from the (N-1)+M chunks to the newly
constructed N+M chunks for efficient disk usage.
The RAID levels are defined as follows:
● RAID 5: Parity data is distributed on different chunks. In
each chunk group, the parity data occupies the space of
one chunk. RAID 5 is able to tolerate the failure on only
one chunk. If two or more chunks fail, data in the chunk
group cannot be recovered.
● RAID 6: Parity data is distributed on different chunks. In
each chunk group, the parity data occupies the space of
two chunks. RAID 6 is able to tolerate simultaneous
failures on two chunks. If three or more chunks fail, data
in the chunk group cannot be recovered.
● RAID-TP: Parity data is distributed on different chunks. In
each chunk group, the parity data occupies the space of
three chunks. RAID-TP is able to tolerate simultaneous
failures on three chunks. If four or more chunks fail, data
in the chunk group cannot be recovered.
NOTE
● When Redundancy Policy is set to Disk redundancy, possible
options for this parameter are RAID 5, RAID 6, and RAID-TP.
● When Redundancy Policy is set to Enclosure redundancy,
possible options for this parameter are RAID 6 and RAID-TP.
[Default value]
RAID 6 for disk redundancy and RAID-TP for enclosure
redundancy

Controller Select the controller enclosures to which the storage pool

Enclosure belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when Redundancy Policy is set to
Disk redundancy.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Controller Click Select. On the Select Controller Enclosure and Disk

Enclosure and Enclosure page that is displayed, select the controller
Disk Enclosure enclosures and disk enclosures to which the storage pool
belongs and click OK.
When Redundancy Policy is set to Enclosure redundancy,
disks in the storage pool must come from at least four
enclosures (including controller enclosures and disk
enclosures). That is:
● For a 2 U device, disks in the storage pool must come
from at least one controller enclosure and three disk
enclosures or at least four disk enclosures.
● For a 4 U device, disks in the storage pool must come
from at least four disk enclosures.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when Redundancy Policy is set to
Enclosure redundancy.

SmartTier Manually select drives of the SCM and SSD types to activate
SmartTier.
SCM drive types include SCM drives.
SSD drive types include SSDs and NVMe SSDs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when Redundancy Policy is set to
Disk redundancy and the selected controller enclosure contains
SCM drives.

Storage Pool Set the capacity of the storage pool.

Capacity When Redundancy Policy is set to Disk redundancy,
parameters, including Capacity per Disk, Type, Available
Disks, and Selectable Disks per Controller Enclosure, are
displayed in the function pane of Storage Pool Capacity. In
the text box of Required Disks, enter the number of disks in
each controller enclosure used to create the storage pool.
When Redundancy Policy is set to Enclosure redundancy,
parameters, including Capacity per Disk, Type, Available
Disks, and Selectable Disks per Disk Enclosure, are
displayed in the function pane of Storage Pool Capacity. In
the text box of Required Disks, enter the number of disks in
each disk enclosure used to create the storage pool. Select
at least three disks from each disk enclosure.
NOTE
You can click Select to manually select disks.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Hot Spare Policy Hot spare policy of the storage pool. Hot spare space stores
data from the failed member disks to ensure system
continuity and reliability.
[Value range]
None, Low (1 disk), High (2 disks), Custom (3 disks),
Custom (4 disks), Custom (5 disks), Custom (6 disks),
Custom (7 disks), and Custom (8 disks)
[Default value]
Low (1 disk)
NOTE
● Hot spare capacity is provided by all member disks in each
storage pool because the storage system uses RAID 2.0+
virtualization technology. For ease of understanding, the hot
spare capacity is expressed in the number of hot spare disks on
DeviceManager.
● Even if the hot spare space is used up, the system can use the
free space of the storage pool to reconstruct data, ensuring
storage system reliability.

Capacity Alarm When the percentage of the storage pool's allocated

Threshold (%) capacity to its total capacity reaches this threshold, the
system generates a capacity alarm.
A proper capacity alarm threshold helps you monitor the
capacity usage of a storage pool.
[Value range]
1 to 95
[Default value]
80

Capacity Used When the percentage of the storage pool's allocated

Up Alarm capacity to its total capacity reaches this threshold, the
Threshold (%) system generates an alarm indicating that the capacity is
being used up. The severity of this alarm is higher than that
of the capacity alarm.
[Value range]
2 to 99
[Default value]
90
NOTE
The value of Capacity Used Up Alarm Threshold (%) must be
greater than that of Capacity Alarm Threshold (%).

Protection Data Indicates whether to automatically delete earliest scheduled

Auto Deletion HyperCDP objects when the percentage of the protection
capacity to the storage pool's total capacity reaches
Protection Capacity Upper Limit (%). The automatic
deletion stops when the percentage becomes less than
Protection Capacity Lower Limit (%).

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Protection Lower limit for the percentage of the protection capacity to

Capacity Lower the storage pool's total capacity for the system to stop
Limit (%) deleting earliest scheduled HyperCDP objects.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when Protection Data Auto
Deletion is enabled.
[Value range]
1 to 95
[Default value]
20

Protection Maximum allowable percentage of the protection capacity

Capacity Upper to the storage pool's total capacity. After this threshold is
Limit (%) reached, the system automatically deletes earliest scheduled
HyperCDP objects.
NOTE
● This parameter is available only when Protection Data Auto
Deletion is enabled.
● The value of Protection Capacity Upper Limit (%) must be
greater than that of Protection Capacity Lower Limit (%).
[Value range]
2 to 99
[Default value]
30

NOTE

Parameters including Description, Data Encryption, RAID Policy, Capacity Alarm

Threshold (%), Capacity Used Up Alarm Threshold (%), and Protection Data Auto
Deletion are hidden. You can click Advanced to display them.

Step 4 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

4.4.2 Creating a Storage Pool (Applicable to 6.1.2 and Later)

This section describes how to create a storage pool from which application servers
can use storage space.

Context
You can learn about storage principles such as redundancy policies, RAID policies,
and hot spare policies by referring to section "Basic Storage Principles." You can
learn how to plan storage pool parameters by referring to section "Planning
Storage Pools."

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Storage Pools.

Step 2 Click Create.

The Create Storage Pool page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

The screenshot is for reference only and the actual GUI may vary.

Step 3 Set the storage pool parameters.

Table 4-4 describes the parameters.

Table 4-4 Advanced storage pool parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the storage pool.

[Value range]
● The name must be unique.
● The name contains only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Description Description of the storage pool.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Data Encryption Indicates whether to enable data encryption for all self-
encrypting disks (SEDs) in the storage pool.
● If this function is disabled, the storage pool is not
encrypted.
● If this function is enabled, the storage pool is encrypted.
Ensure that you select only SEDs.
NOTE
If this function is enabled, the system automatically checks whether
the key service has been configured. If the key service has not been
configured, the system will prompt you to configure the key service.
For details, see the Disk Encryption User Guide specific to your
product model and version.

Redundancy Redundancy policy of the storage pool. Possible options are

Policy Disk redundancy and Enclosure redundancy.
● Disk redundancy: Chunks in a chunk group come from
different SSDs. With this redundancy policy used, the
system can tolerate disk failures within the RAID
redundancy.
● Enclosure redundancy: Chunks in a chunk group come
from different SSDs and are distributed in different
enclosures. In addition, the number of chunk columns in
each enclosure does not exceed the RAID redundancy.
With this redundancy policy used, the system can tolerate
a single disk enclosure failure without service
interruption and data loss.
NOTE
● The redundancy policy of a storage pool cannot be changed
once being specified during storage pool creation.
● If Enclosure redundancy is selected, select the controller
enclosures and disk enclosures to which the storage pool
belongs.
[Default value]
Disk redundancy

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

RAID Policy RAID policy of the storage pool. Dynamic RAID is used.
Dynamic RAID reconstruction uses the erasure coding (EC)
algorithm, which dynamically adjusts the number of chunks
in a chunk group under all-SSD configurations to ensure
system reliability and capacity. If a chunk is faulty and no
chunk is available from disks outside the storage pool, the
system dynamically reconstructs the original N+M chunks to
(N-1)+M chunks. When a new SSD is inserted, the system
migrates data from the (N-1)+M chunks to the newly
constructed N+M chunks for efficient disk usage.
The RAID levels are defined as follows:
● RAID 5: Parity data is distributed on different chunks. In
each chunk group, the parity data occupies the space of
one chunk. RAID 5 is able to tolerate the failure on only
one chunk. If two or more chunks fail, data in the chunk
group cannot be recovered.
● RAID 10: Parity data is distributed on different chunks. In
each chunk group, the parity data occupies the space of
two chunks. RAID 10 is able to tolerate simultaneous
failures on two chunks. If three or more chunks fail, data
in the chunk group cannot be recovered. The number of
chunks in a chunk group is fixed to 4.
● RAID 6: Parity data is distributed on different chunks. In
each chunk group, the parity data occupies the space of
two chunks. RAID 6 is able to tolerate simultaneous
failures on two chunks. If three or more chunks fail, data
in the chunk group cannot be recovered.
● RAID-TP: Parity data is distributed on different chunks. In
each chunk group, the parity data occupies the space of
three chunks. RAID-TP is able to tolerate simultaneous
failures on three chunks. If four or more chunks fail, data
in the chunk group cannot be recovered.
NOTE
● For 6.1.2 and later versions, RAID 5 can be configured only in CLI
mode.
● When Redundancy Policy is set to Disk redundancy, possible
options for this parameter are RAID 6 and RAID-TP.
● When Redundancy Policy is set to Enclosure redundancy,
possible options for this parameter are RAID 10, RAID 6 and
RAID-TP.
[Default value]
RAID 6 for disk redundancy and RAID-TP for enclosure
redundancy

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Controller Select the controller enclosures to which the storage pool

Enclosure belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when Redundancy Policy is set to
Disk redundancy.

Controller Click Select. On the Select Controller Enclosure and Disk

Enclosure and Enclosure page that is displayed, select the controller
Disk Enclosure enclosures and disk enclosures to which the storage pool
belongs and click OK.
When Redundancy Policy is set to Enclosure redundancy,
disks in the storage pool must come from at least four
enclosures (including controller enclosures and disk
enclosures). That is:
● For a 2 U device, disks in the storage pool must come
from at least one controller enclosure and three disk
enclosures or at least four disk enclosures.
● For a 4 U device, disks in the storage pool must come
from at least four disk enclosures.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when Redundancy Policy is set to
Enclosure redundancy.

SmartTier Manually select drives of the SCM and SSD types to activate
SmartTier.
SCM drive types include SCM drives.
SSD drive types include SSDs and NVMe SSDs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when Redundancy Policy is set to
Disk redundancy and the selected controller enclosure contains
SCM drives.

Storage Pool Set the capacity of the storage pool.

Capacity When Redundancy Policy is set to Disk redundancy,
parameters, including Capacity per Disk, Type, Available
Disks, and Selectable Disks per Controller Enclosure, are
displayed in the function pane of Storage Pool Capacity. In
the text box of Required Disks, enter the number of disks in
each controller enclosure used to create the storage pool.
When Redundancy Policy is set to Enclosure redundancy,
parameters, including Capacity per Disk, Type, Available
Disks, and Selectable Disks per Disk Enclosure, are
displayed in the function pane of Storage Pool Capacity. In
the text box of Required Disks, enter the number of disks in
each disk enclosure used to create the storage pool. Select
at least three disks from each disk enclosure.
NOTE
You can click Select to manually select disks.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Hot Spare Policy Hot spare policy of the storage pool. Hot spare space stores
data from the failed member disks to ensure system
continuity and reliability.
[Value range]
None, Low (1 disk), High (2 disks), Custom (3 disks),
Custom (4 disks), Custom (5 disks), Custom (6 disks),
Custom (7 disks), and Custom (8 disks)
[Default value]
Low (1 disk)
NOTE
● Hot spare capacity is provided by all member disks in each
storage pool because the storage system uses RAID 2.0+
virtualization technology. For ease of understanding, the hot
spare capacity is expressed in the number of hot spare disks on
DeviceManager.
● Even if the hot spare space is used up, the system can use the
free space of the storage pool to reconstruct data, ensuring
storage system reliability.

Capacity Alarm When the percentage of the storage pool's allocated

Threshold (%) capacity to its total capacity reaches this threshold, the
system generates a capacity alarm.
A proper capacity alarm threshold helps you monitor the
capacity usage of a storage pool.
[Value range]
1 to 95
[Default value]
80

Capacity Used When the percentage of the storage pool's allocated

Up Alarm capacity to its total capacity reaches this threshold, the
Threshold (%) system generates an alarm indicating that the capacity is
being used up. The severity of this alarm is higher than that
of the capacity alarm.
[Value range]
2 to 99
[Default value]
90
NOTE
The value of Capacity Used Up Alarm Threshold (%) must be
greater than that of Capacity Alarm Threshold (%).

Protection Data Indicates whether to automatically delete earliest scheduled

Auto Deletion HyperCDP objects when the percentage of the protection
capacity to the storage pool's total capacity reaches
Protection Capacity Upper Limit (%). The automatic
deletion stops when the percentage becomes less than
Protection Capacity Lower Limit (%).

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Protection Lower limit for the percentage of the protection capacity to

Capacity Lower the storage pool's total capacity for the system to stop
Limit (%) deleting earliest scheduled HyperCDP objects.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when Protection Data Auto
Deletion is enabled.
[Value range]
1 to 95
[Default value]
20

Protection Maximum allowable percentage of the protection capacity

Capacity Upper to the storage pool's total capacity. After this threshold is
Limit (%) reached, the system automatically deletes earliest scheduled
HyperCDP objects.
NOTE
● This parameter is available only when Protection Data Auto
Deletion is enabled.
● The value of Protection Capacity Upper Limit (%) must be
greater than that of Protection Capacity Lower Limit (%).
[Value range]
2 to 99
[Default value]
30

NOTE

Parameters including Description, Data Encryption, RAID Policy, Capacity Alarm

Threshold (%), Capacity Used Up Alarm Threshold (%), and Protection Data Auto
Deletion are hidden. You can click Advanced to display them.

Step 4 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

NOTE

After the task is created successfully, the Execution Result page is displayed. You can view
details about the current task on this page.

----End

4.5 Creating a LUN

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

4.5.1 Creating a LUN (Applicable to 6.1.0)

After creating a storage pool, you must create LUNs in it and map the LUNs to
hosts. This allows the hosts to use the storage resources provided by the storage
pool.

Context
● All LUNs created in a storage system are thin LUNs, which are logical disks
accessible to hosts. The storage system dynamically allocates storage
resources to thin LUNs based on actual capacities used by hosts, instead of
allocating all preset capacities. The total capacity allocated to a thin LUN will
not exceed its preset capacity.
● For details about the specifications, visit Specifications Query.
● Before creating a LUN, you are advised to clear any alarms indicating that the
storage pool capacity is about to be used up.
● The total capacity configured for all LUNs in a storage pool can exceed the
actual capacity of the storage pool. If an alarm is generated, indicating that
the storage pool capacity is used up, you are advised to expand the storage
pool as soon as possible.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUNs.
Step 2 Click Create.
The Create LUN page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

NOTE

The screenshot is for reference only and the actual GUI may vary.

NOTE

For some device models, you can click in the upper right corner of the page to enable
SmartGUI. SmartGUI mines users' historical operation data and builds a configuration
parameter recommendation model based on user profiles to recommend configuration
parameters for the block service and file service. After SmartGUI is enabled, the system
presets parameters based on recommendations when you create a LUN. You can click
Modify in the upper right corner to modify the parameters or directly click OK to create a
LUN.

Step 3 Set the LUN parameters.

Table 4-5 describes the parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Table 4-5 LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the LUN.

[Value range]
● The name must be unique.
● The name contains only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters when Quantity is
1 and 1 to 251 characters when Quantity is greater than
1.

Description Description of the LUN.

[Value range]
The description can be left blank or contain up to 255
characters.

Start ID Start ID of the LUN.

Owning Storage Storage pool to which the LUN belongs.

Pool

Capacity Capacity of the LUN. This is the maximum capacity that will
be allocated to a thin LUN. The total storage resources
dynamically allocated to the thin LUN must not exceed the
value of this parameter.
NOTE
● The maximum capacity of the LUN must not exceed the system
specifications. For details about the specifications, visit
Specifications Query.
● You can set the capacity unit to Blocks to create LUNs by block.
A block is equal to 512 bytes. The LUN capacity must not be
smaller than 1024 blocks (that is, 512 KB).
● Storage system capacity equation: 1 PB = 1,024 TB, 1 TB = 1,024
GB, 1 GB = 1,024 MB, 1 MB = 1,024 KB, 1 KB = 1,024 bytes.

Quantity Number of LUNs created in a batch. Set this parameter

based on site requirements.
[Value range]
1 to 500
NOTE
LUNs created in a batch have the same capacity.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Start Number Start number from which the system incrementally adds a
suffix number to the name of each LUN for distinction.
[Value range]
0 to (10000 – Number of LUNs created in a batch)
NOTE
● This parameter is displayed only when Quantity is greater than
1 and Advanced is selected.
● For example, if you want to create 300 LUNs, the value range of
the start number is 0 to 9700.

Application Type Application type of the LUN. Preset application types are
provided for typical applications. In block service scenarios,
possible options are Default, Oracle_OLAP, Oracle_OLTP,
Oracle_OLAP&OLTP, SQL_Server_OLAP, SQL_Server_OLTP,
SQL_Server_OLAP&OLTP, SAP_HANA, Vmware_VDI,
Hyper-V_VDI, and FusionAccess_VDI.
NOTE
● The preset application types specify the application request sizes.
When SmartCompression and SmartDedupe licenses are
imported to the system, the preset application types also display
whether SmartCompression and SmartDedupe are enabled.
Application Request Size is 32 KB for Oracle_OLAP and
SQL_Server_OLAP, and 8 KB for the other preset application
types. For details, see SmartDedupe and SmartCompression
Feature Guide for Block of the desired product model and
version.
● After you have set an application type for a LUN, you are unable
to change it in follow-up operations.
● If the application type configured for a LUN does not match the
actual I/O model, the LUN performance may deteriorate.
● If none of the preset application types matches the actual I/O
model, you can run the create lun_workload_type general
command to create one. For details on this command, refer to
the command reference.
● The application request sizes specified by preset application
types may vary with product models. The actual values displayed
on the page prevail.

Map to Host Host to which the LUN you are creating is mapped.
NOTE
● If no host is available in the system, click Create.
● You can also map the LUNs after creating them.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Host LUN ID ID of the LUN after being mapped to a host.

● Automatic: The system assigns a host LUN ID to each
LUN mapped to a host.
● Start ID: Set a start ID ranging from 0 to 4095. The
system assigns a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a
host, starting from Start ID.
● Specified ID: Manually assign a host LUN ID to each LUN
mapped to a host.

SmartCache Indicates whether to add the LUN to a SmartCache

Partition partition. Adding a LUN to a SmartCache partition shortens
the response time for reading the LUN.

NOTE

Description, Start ID, Start Number, Host LUN ID, and SmartCache Partition are hidden
parameters. You can click Advanced to display them.

Step 4 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

4.5.2 Creating a LUN (Applicable to 6.1.2 and Later)

After creating a storage pool, you must create LUNs in it and map the LUNs to
hosts. This allows the hosts to use the storage resources provided by the storage
pool.

Context
● All LUNs created in a storage system are thin LUNs, which are logical disks
accessible to hosts. The storage system dynamically allocates storage
resources to thin LUNs based on actual capacities used by hosts, instead of
allocating all preset capacities. The total capacity allocated to a thin LUN will
not exceed its preset capacity.
● For details about the specifications, see the Specifications Query tool.
● Before creating a LUN, you are advised to clear any alarms indicating that the
storage pool capacity is about to be used up.
● The total capacity configured for all LUNs in a storage pool can exceed the
actual capacity of the storage pool. If an alarm is generated, indicating that
the storage pool capacity is used up, you are advised to expand the storage
pool as soon as possible.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUNs.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click Create.

The Create LUN page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

The screenshot is for reference only and the actual displayed information may vary.

For some device models, you can click in the upper right corner of the page to enable
SmartGUI. SmartGUI mines users' historical operation data and builds a configuration
parameter recommendation model based on user profiles to recommend configuration
parameters for the block service and file service. After SmartGUI is enabled, the system
presets parameters based on recommendations when you create a LUN. You can click
Modify in the upper right corner to modify the parameters or directly click OK to create a
LUN.

Step 4 Set the LUN parameters.

Table 4-6 describes the parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Table 4-6 LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the LUN.

[Value range]
● The name must be unique.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters when Quantity is
1 and 1 to 251 characters when Quantity is greater than
1.

Owning vStore vStore to which the newly created LUN belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is mandatory when vStore is set to All vStores in
Step 2.

Description Description of the LUN.

[Value range]
The description can be left blank or contain up to 255
characters.

Start ID Start ID of the LUN.

Owning Storage Storage pool to which the LUN belongs.

Pool

Capacity Capacity of the LUN. This is the maximum capacity that will
be allocated to a thin LUN. The total storage resources
dynamically allocated to the thin LUN must not exceed the
value of this parameter.
NOTE
● The maximum capacity of the LUN must not exceed the system
specifications. For details about the specifications, see the
Specifications Query tool.
● You can set the capacity unit to Blocks to create LUNs by block.
A block is equal to 512 bytes. The LUN capacity must not be
smaller than 1024 blocks (that is, 512 KB).
● The storage system uses the following capacity algorithms
defined by Windows: 1 PB = 1,024 TB, 1 TB = 1,024 GB, 1 GB =
1,024 MB, 1 MB = 1,024 KB, and 1 KB = 1,024 bytes.

Quantity Number of LUNs created in a batch. Set this parameter

based on site requirements.
[Value range]
1 to 500
NOTE
LUNs created in a batch have the same capacity.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Suffix Digits Number of digits in the suffixes of the LUNs to be created in

a batch.
NOTE
This parameter is displayed only when Quantity is greater than 1
and Advanced is selected.

Suffix Set the start number of the suffixes of the LUNs to be

created in a batch. The system adds a suffix to the end of
each LUN name in ascending order based on the specified
start suffix number.
NOTE
● This parameter is displayed only when Quantity is greater than
1 and Advanced is selected.
● The value range of Suffix is 0 to (10000 – Quantity).
● For example, if you want to create 300 LUNs, the value range of
Suffix is 0 to 9700.

Application Type Application type of the LUN. The following preset

application types are provided for typical applications: In
block service scenarios, possible options are Default,
Oracle_OLAP, Oracle_OLTP, Oracle_OLAP&OLTP,
SQL_Server_OLAP, SQL_Server_OLTP,
SQL_Server_OLAP&OLTP, SAP_HANA, Vmware_VDI,
Hyper-V_VDI, Others, and FusionAccess_VDI.
NOTE
● The preset application types specify the application request sizes.
When SmartCompression and SmartDedupe licenses are
imported to the system, the preset application types also display
whether SmartCompression and SmartDedupe are enabled. For
details, see SmartDedupe and SmartCompression Feature Guide
for Block of the desired product model and version.
● After you have set an application type for a LUN, you are unable
to change it in follow-up operations.
● If the application type configured for a LUN does not match the
actual I/O model, the LUN performance may deteriorate.
● If none of the preset application types matches the actual I/O
model, you can run the create lun_workload_type general
command to create one. For details on this command, refer to
the Command Reference.
● Only 6.1.3 and later versions support Others.

SmartCache Indicates whether to add the LUN to a SmartCache

Partition partition. Adding a LUN to a SmartCache partition shortens
the response time for reading the LUN.

Add to LUN Existing LUN group to which the created LUN is added.
Group NOTE
Parameters Add to LUN Group and Map to Host cannot be
specified at the same time.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Map to Host Host to which the LUN you are creating is mapped.
NOTE
● If no host is available in the system, click Create.
● You can also map the LUNs after creating them.

Port Group Port group to which the mapping is added. After this
parameter is specified, the LUN and its mapped host are
added to the port group for communication.
NOTE
● This parameter is displayed only when Map to Host is specified.
● If no port group is available, click Create to create one.

Host LUN ID ID of the LUN after being mapped to a host.

● Automatic: The system assigns a host LUN ID to each
LUN mapped to a host.
● Start ID: Set a start ID ranging from 0 to 4095. The
system assigns a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a
host, starting from Start ID.
● Specified ID: Manually assign a host LUN ID to each LUN
mapped to a host.

NOTE

Description, Start ID, SmartCache Partition, and Host LUN ID are hidden parameters. To
display hidden parameters, click Advanced.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

NOTE

If the LUN is mapped to a host, after the task is created successfully, the Execution Result
page is displayed. You can view details about the current task on this page.

----End

4.6 (Optional) Creating a LUN Group

This section describes how to create a LUN group to facilitate the management of
multiple LUNs that store data for the same user application.

Context
For details about the specifications, see the Specifications Query tool.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click Create.

The Create LUN Group page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

The screenshot is for reference only and the actual displayed information may vary.

For some device models, you can click in the upper right corner of the page to enable
SmartGUI. SmartGUI mines users' historical operation data and builds a configuration
parameter recommendation model based on user profiles to recommend configuration
parameters for the block service and file service. After SmartGUI is enabled, the system
presets parameters based on recommendations when you create a LUN group. You can click
Modify in the upper right corner to modify the parameters or directly click OK to create a
LUN group.

Step 4 Set LUN group information.

1. Set the name of the new LUN group.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

NOTE

– The name must be unique.

– The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.), underscores (_), and hyphens
(-).
– The name contains 1 to 255 characters.
2. In the Owning vStore drop-down list, select the vStore to which the newly
created LUN belongs.
3. Input necessary information about the LUN group in Description to help you
identify the LUN group.
NOTE

Description is hidden. You can click Advanced to display it.

4. Select LUNs.
– If you select New LUN:
i. Select the storage pool to which the LUN belongs and set
Application Type for the LUNs.
NOTE

The following preset application types are provided for typical applications:
Default, Oracle_OLAP, Oracle_OLTP, Oracle_OLAP&OLTP,
SQL_Server_OLAP, SQL_Server_OLTP, SQL_Server_OLAP&OLTP,
SAP_HANA, Vmware_VDI, Hyper-V_VDI, Others, and FusionAccess_VDI
○ The preset application types specify the application request sizes. When
SmartCompression and SmartDedupe licenses are imported to the
system, the preset application types also display whether
SmartCompression and SmartDedupe are enabled. For details, see
SmartDedupe and SmartCompression Feature Guide for Block of the
desired product model and version.
○ After you have set an application type for a LUN, you are unable to
change it in follow-up operations.
○ If the application type configured for a LUN does not match the actual
I/O model, the LUN performance may deteriorate.
○ If none of the preset application types matches the actual I/O model,
you can run the create lun_workload_type general command to create
one. For details on this command, refer to the Command Reference.
○ Only 6.1.3 and later versions support Others.

ii. Specify the LUN name prefix, capacity per LUN, and quantity. Table
4-7 describes the parameters.

Table 4-7 LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Prefix Name prefix of the LUN. The names of the new
LUNs are numbered in sequence based on the
name prefix.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Capacity per Maximum capacity that will be allocated to a thin

LUN LUN. The total storage resources dynamically
allocated to the thin LUN must not exceed the
value of this parameter.
NOTE
○ The maximum capacity of the LUN must not exceed
the system specifications.
○ You can set the capacity unit to Blocks to create
LUNs by block. A block is equal to 512 bytes. The
LUN capacity must not be smaller than 1024 blocks
(that is, 512 KB).
○ The storage system uses the following capacity
algorithms defined by Windows: 1 PB = 1,024 TB, 1
TB = 1,024 GB, 1 GB = 1,024 MB, 1 MB = 1,024 KB,
and 1 KB = 1,024 bytes.

Quantity Number of LUNs created in a batch. Set this

parameter based on site requirements.
[Value range]
1 to 500
NOTE
○ LUNs created in a batch have the same capacity.
○ When LUNs are created in a batch, the system
automatically adds suffixes to the names based on
the number of LUNs for distinction. You can click
to manually specify the suffixes.

iii. (Optional) When creating LUNs in a batch, click and set the
suffixes of the LUNs. Related parameters include Suffix Digits and
Suffix (start number of the suffixes). The system adds a suffix to the
end of each LUN name in ascending order based on the specified
start suffix number.
NOTE

○ The value range of Suffix is 0 to (10000 – Quantity).

○ For example, if you want to create 300 LUNs, the value range of Suffix is
0 to 9700.

iv. (Optional) Click to add more LUNs.

v. (Optional) Click to remove LUNs.
– If you select Existing LUN:
Select one or more LUNs from Available LUNs to add them to Selected
LUNs.
NOTE

You can select Only show the LUNs that do not belong to any LUN group to
view LUNs that do not belong to any LUN group.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

5. (Optional) Configure a mapping for the LUN group.

a. Select a host or host group.
NOTE

If no host or host group exists in the system, click Create to create one.
b. Select a port group.
NOTE

▪ To display this option, select the host or host group to which the LUN group is
to be mapped.

▪ If no port group exists in the system, click Create to create one.

c. Select Advanced in the upper right corner and set how to assign host
LUN IDs.

▪ Automatic: The system assigns a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped

to a host.

▪ Start ID: Set a start ID ranging from 0 to 4095. The system assigns a
host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host, starting from Start ID.

▪ Specified ID: Manually assign a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to

a host.
d. If HyperMetro pairs have been created for the selected LUNs, determine
whether to select Same Host LUN ID. If you select it, the system forcibly
ensures that the host LUN IDs of the local and remote LUNs in the same
HyperMetro pairs are the same. In SAN-based HyperMetro scenarios
involving ESX hosts, if the host LUN IDs of the local and remote LUNs in
the same HyperMetro pairs are different, data may be inconsistent.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

NOTE

After the task is created successfully, the Execution Result page is displayed. You can view
details about the current task on this page.

----End

4.7 Creating a Host

This section describes how to create a virtual host on a storage system and add an
initiator for the host to establish a mapping between the storage system and
application server.

4.7.1 Creating a Host

This section describes how to create a single virtual host on a storage system.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Context
● DeviceManager not only allows users to manually create hosts but also
provides the host scan function. To use the host scan function, perform the
following operations:
a. Install UltraPath on a host and connect the host to the storage system
over a physical network.
b. On DeviceManager, choose Settings > Block Service. Click Modify in the
upper right corner of the page. In the UltraPath Host Scan area, enable
Scan for Host.
c. Scan for disks on hosts and wait for about 4 minutes.
d. On DeviceManager, choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups >
Hosts and click Scan for Host. The system automatically scans for all
hosts connected to the storage system, identifies their WWNs or IQNs,
and creates corresponding virtual hosts on the storage system. If a host
has multiple WWNs or IQNs, the system can automatically identify and
configure them on the same host.
● When a host is created, the storage system automatically sets the default host
access mode based on the host operating system. For example, in 6.1.3, if OS
is set to Windows or Solaris when a host is created, Host Access Mode is
Asymmetric by default. For details about how to change the host access
mode, see 5.7.14 Modifying the Properties of a Host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, choose Create > Create Host.
The Create Host page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

NOTE

The screenshot is for reference only and the actual GUI may vary.

Step 4 Set basic information for the host.

Table 4-8 describes the parameters.

Table 4-8 Host parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the host.

[Value range]
● The name must be unique.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods
(.), underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Owning vStore vStore to which the newly created host belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is mandatory when vStore is set to All
vStores in Step 2.

Description Description of the host.

OS Operating system used by the host.

[Value range]
The value can be Linux, Windows, Solaris, HP-UX,
AIX, XenServer, Mac OS, VMware ESX, LINUX_VIS,
OpenVMS, Oracle_VM_Server_for_x86, and
Oracle_VM_Server_for_SPARC.
NOTE
The selected operating system must be the same as that of
the application server connected to the storage system.

IP Address IP address of the host.

NOTE
If a host is connected over iSCSI links, enter the service IP
address of the host for easy management.

Location Location of the host.

NOTE

Parameters Description and Location are hidden. You can click Advanced to display them.

Step 5 Configure initiators for the host.

1. Select an initiator type (FC, iSCSI, or NVMe over RoCE) based on service
requirements.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

2. For an FC initiator, you need to select the vStore to which the initiator
belongs. An FC initiator whose owning vStore is the same as that of the
created host or whose owning vStore is -- can be added to the host.
For iSCSI and NVMe over RoCE initiators, you can only add initiators whose
owning vStore is the same as that of the created host to the host.
3. If initiators have been configured on the application server, select one or more
initiators in the initiator list. If no initiator is available in the list, click Create
Initiator below the initiator list to manually create an initiator.

NOTE

● Do not add initiators of different application servers to the same host.

● If the host operating system is HP-UX, create an initiator manually.
● You are advised to map a LUN to a host using initiators of the same type.

Step 6 (Optional) Click Create Initiator. On the Create Initiator page that is displayed,
set the related parameters.
NOTE

● If initiators have been configured on an application server:

– When initiators can be automatically discovered on DeviceManager, skip this step.
– When initiators cannot be automatically discovered on DeviceManager, create
initiators using the IQNs or WWPNs of initiators configured on the application
server.
● If no initiator has been configured on an application server, configure initiators by
following instructions in Configuring Connectivity in the corresponding Host
Connectivity Guide and then add initiators on DeviceManager.
● On DeviceManager, set parameters of initiators manually created or automatically
discovered based on the multipathing software and host operating system version. For
details about recommended parameter settings in different scenarios, see Configuring
Multipathing in the corresponding Host Connectivity Guide . For iSCSI initiators, you
need to set CHAP authentication parameters based on the security authentication plan.

Table 4-9 describes the FC initiator parameters.

Table 4-9 FC initiator parameters

Parameter Description

WWPN World Wide Port Name (WWPN) of the initiator.

[Value range]
A WWPN is a hexadecimal value that contains 16 characters.
It can contain letters A to F (uppercase and lowercase) and
digits 0 to 9. It cannot be all 0, all F, or all f.

Alias Alias of the initiator.

[Value range]
● An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31 characters.
● An alias can contain only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Table 4-10 describes the iSCSI initiator parameters.

Table 4-10 iSCSI initiator parameters

Parameter Description

IQN iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN) of the iSCSI initiator.

NOTE
The IQN of an initiator must be the same as the one on the
application server. The IQN of an initiator must be unique. Do not
configure the initiators of multiple application servers with the same
IQN.
[Value range]
An IQN must contain 1 to 223 visible ASCII characters and
start with a digit or letter.

Alias Alias of the iSCSI initiator.

[Value range]
● An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31 characters.
● An alias can contain only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).

CHAP CHAP authentication includes Normal Authentication and

Discovery Authentication options.
● If you enable CHAP, you must configure a CHAP name
and password for the storage system and the same CHAP
name and password on the application server.
● If you do not enable CHAP, you do not need to configure
a CHAP name or password.
NOTE
After changing the CHAP authentication password on the storage
system, you must use the new password to configure the CHAP
authentication again on the application server.

Normal The normal session is the process during which the target
Authentication and initiator transmit data between each other after
connections have been set up. Authentication modes include:
● No authentication
● Unidirectional authentication
The target authenticates the initiator.
● Bidirectional authentication
The target and initiator authenticate each other.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Discovery The discovery session is the process during which the target
Authentication and initiator are setting up connections. Authentication
modes include:
● No authentication
● Unidirectional authentication
The target authenticates the initiator.
● Bidirectional authentication
The target and initiator authenticate each other.
NOTE
When Normal Authentication or Discovery Authentication is set to
Bidirectional authentication, you need to specify the CHAP Name
and Password, and confirm the password in both the Target
Authenticates Initiator and Initiator Authenticates Target areas.

CHAP Name User name for CHAP authentication.

NOTE
● The name must contain 4 to 223 characters.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, and special characters
(!"#$&%'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~).
● The first character must be a letter or digit.

Password Password for CHAP authentication.

NOTE
● The password can contain 12 to 16 characters.
● The password must contain at least three types of characters
among uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, and special
characters (`~!@#$%^&*()-_=+|[{}];:<,.\>/? and spaces).
● The password must not be the same as the user name or the user
name spelled backwards.

Confirm Password for CHAP authentication.

Password [Value range]
The value of Confirm Password must be consistent with that
of Password.

Table 4-11 describes the NVMe over RoCE initiator parameters.

Table 4-11 NVMe over RoCE initiator parameters

Parameter Description

NQN World Wide Port Name (WWPN) of the initiator.

[Value range]
● The value contains 1 to 223 characters.
● The value must start with a digit or letter.
● The value must be visible ASCII characters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Alias Alias of the initiator.

[Value range]
● An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31 characters.
● The value can contain only letters, digits, underscores (_),
hyphens (-), and periods (.).

NOTE

After you click OK, the new initiator is automatically added to the list on the right.

Step 7 Confirm your operation.

● If no initiator has been added for the host, no further action is required.
● If initiators have been added for the host, a security alert dialog box is
displayed.
a. Confirm the information in the dialog box and select I have read and
understand the consequences associated with performing this
operation.
b. Click OK.
The Execution Result page is displayed, indicating that the operation
succeeded.
c. Click Close.
----End

4.7.2 Creating Hosts in Batches

This section describes how to create virtual hosts in batches.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, choose Create > Create Hosts.
The Create Hosts page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

NOTE

The screenshot is for reference only and the actual GUI may vary.

Step 4 Set basic information for the hosts.

Table 4-12 describes the parameters.

Table 4-12 Host parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the host.

[Value range]
● The name must be unique.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods
(.), underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters when
Quantity is 1 and 1 to 251 characters when
Quantity is greater than 1.

Owning vStore vStore to which the newly created host belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is mandatory when vStore is set to All
vStores in Step 2.

Description Description of the host.

Quantity Number of hosts to be created in a batch.

NOTE
A maximum of 500 hosts can be created at a time.

Suffix Digits Number of digits in the suffixes of the hosts to be

created in a batch.
NOTE
This parameter is displayed only when Quantity is greater
than 1.

Suffix Set the start number of the suffixes of the hosts to be

created in a batch. The system adds a suffix to the
end of each host name in ascending order based on
the specified start suffix number.
NOTE
● This parameter is displayed only when Quantity is
greater than 1.
● The value range of Suffix is 0 to (10000 – Quantity).
● For example, if you want to create 300 hosts, the value
range of Suffix is 0 to 9700.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

OS Operating system used by the host.

[Value range]
The value can be Linux, Windows, Solaris, HP-UX,
AIX, XenServer, Mac OS, VMware ESX, LINUX_VIS,
OpenVMS, Oracle_VM_Server_for_x86, and
Oracle_VM_Server_for_SPARC.
NOTE
The selected operating system must be the same as that of
the application server connected to the storage system.

Location Location of the host.

NOTE

Parameters Description and Location are hidden. You can click Advanced to display them.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

4.8 (Optional) Creating a Host Group

If an application is deployed on a cluster consisting of multiple hosts, these hosts
will access the data volumes of the application at the same time. In this case, you
can create a host group for these hosts.

Context
Hosts in a host group can run different operating systems.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, click Create.

The Create Host Group page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

NOTE

The screenshot is for reference only and the actual GUI may vary.

Step 4 Set the host group parameters listed in Table 4-13.

Table 4-13 Host group parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the host group.

[Value range]
● The name must be unique.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods
(.), underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Owning vStore vStore to which the newly created host group belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is mandatory when vStore is set to All
vStores in Step 2.

Description Description of the host group.

Step 5 Select one or more hosts from Available Hosts and add them to Selected Hosts.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

NOTE

● You can select Only show the hosts that have not been added to any host group
below the host list, which helps you find the desired hosts.
● You can click Create Host below the host list to create a host.

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

4.9 (Optional) Creating a Port Group

A port group is a logical collection of multiple physical ports. A storage system can
use designated ports, that is, member ports in a port group to establish a mapping
between LUNs and servers. After you create a port group and add it to a mapping,
LUNs and hosts in the mapping use the ports in the port group to communicate
with each other. If no port group is added to a mapping, available ports are
randomly used.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Port Groups.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click Create.

The Create Port Group page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

NOTE

The screenshot is for reference only and the actual GUI may vary.

Step 4 Set parameters of the port group. Table 4-14 describes the parameters.

Table 4-14 Port group parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the port group.

[Value range]
● The name must be unique.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods
(.), underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Owning vStore Specifies the vStore to which the newly created host
belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is mandatory when vStore is set to All
vStores in Step 2.

Description Description of the port group.

Port Type Type of ports to be added to a port group. The value

can be Physical port or Logical port. Only one type
of ports can be added to a port group.

Step 5 Select one or more desired ports from the port list on the left and they are
displayed in the port list on the right.
NOTE

● A port can be added to multiple port groups.

● You can select Include the ports that are link down below the port list, which helps
you find the desired ports.

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

4.10 Creating a Mapping

This section describes how to create a mapping between hosts/host groups and
LUNs/LUN groups so that hosts can use the storage space provided by LUNs.

Context
● Skip this section if you have specified Map to Host when creating a LUN or
Map to Host (or Host Group) when creating a LUN group.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

● For details about specifications, visit Specifications Query.

● Based on the ports used by mappings, mappings can be classified into LUN
mapping and LUN masking.
– LUN mapping: A LUN is bound with the WWPN or IQN of a host's port to
establish a one-to-one or N-to-one connection and access relationship
with the host's port. A host can identify the same LUN regardless of
which port on the storage system is connected to the host.
– LUN masking: A LUN is bound with a front-end port on the storage
system. The LUN that a host can access varies with the storage port
connected to the host.

Creating a Mapping
DeviceManager provides various simple and flexible methods for you to create the
following mappings:
● Mapping between LUNs and a host
You can directly map one or more LUNs to a host in a simple application
scenario or when no LUN groups are required.
● Mapping between a LUN group and a host
If an application requires multiple LUNs, you can use a LUN group to manage
these LUNs. In this case, create a mapping between the LUN group and the
host.
● Mapping between a LUN group and a host group
If an application has its data stored on multiple LUNs and is deployed on a
cluster consisting of multiple hosts, you can use a LUN group to manage the
LUNs and a host group to manage the hosts. In this case, create a mapping
between the LUN group and the host group.

Table 4-15 describes how to create various types of mappings.

Table 4-15 Methods for creating mappings

Object To Be Mapped To Method

Selected

One or more One host + (optional) a 1. Choose Services > Block

LUNs port group Service > LUN Groups > LUNs.
The LUN management page is
displayed.
2. Select one or more LUNs and
click Map.
On the displayed Map LUN
page, set the required
parameters.

One LUN group One host + (optional) a 1. Choose Services > Block
port group Service > LUN Groups > LUN
Groups.
The LUN group management
page is displayed.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Object To Be Mapped To Method

Selected

One host group + 2. Select a LUN group and click

(optional) a port group Map.
On the displayed Map LUN
Group page, set the required
parameters.

One host One or more LUNs 1. Choose Services > Block

Service > Host Groups >
One LUN group + Hosts.
(optional) a port group The host management page is
displayed.
2. Select a host, choose Map >
Map LUN or Map LUN Group.
On the displayed Map LUN or
Map LUN Group page, set the
required parameters.

One host group One LUN group + 1. Choose Services > Block
(optional) a port group Service > Host Groups > Host
Groups.
The host group management
page is displayed.
2. Select a host group, choose
Map > Map LUN Group.
On the displayed Map LUN
Group page, set the required
parameters.

NOTE

● This section describes only the navigation paths in various scenarios. For details about
the operations, see corresponding sections in "Managing Basic Storage Services."
● GUIs may vary with product versions and models. The actual GUIs prevail.

4.11 Configuring the Host Connectivity

This section describes how to configure the connectivity between a host and a
storage system to ensure that the host can properly use the storage resources
allocated by the storage system.

4.11.1 Configuring Storage Service Ports (Applicable to iSCSI

Connections)
When a storage system and a host are connected over iSCSI connections,
configure ports on the storage system based on service requirements before
configuring connectivity to ensure that the storage system can communicate with
the host properly.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Storage system uses logical ports to establish iSCSI connections with hosts. The
home ports of logical ports can be Ethernet ports, bond ports, or VLANs.
● If the storage system communicates with the host using logical ports that
reside on Ethernet ports, configure the storage service ports and other
connectivity configurations by referring to "Establishing iSCSI Connections" in
the Host Connectivity Guide.
● If the storage system communicates with the host using logical ports that
reside on bond ports or VLANs, configure the storage service ports by
following instructions in this section and then configure the connectivity by
referring to "Establishing iSCSI Connections" in the Host Connectivity Guide.
NOTE

If the storage system is connected to a host over Fibre Channel connections, configure the
host and storage system by referring to the Host Connectivity Guide.

Basic Concepts
Table 4-16 lists the basic concepts related to iSCSI Connections.

Table 4-16 Basic concepts related to iSCSI Connections

Concept Description

Ethernet port Ethernet ports on an interface module of a storage system.

Bond ports, VLANs, and logical ports are created based on
Ethernet ports.

Bond port To improve reliability of paths for accessing file systems and
increase bandwidth, you can bond multiple Ethernet ports on
the same controller to form a bond port.

VLAN VLANs logically divide the Ethernet ports or bond ports of a

storage system into multiple broadcast domains. On a VLAN,
when service data is being sent or received, a VLAN ID is
configured for the data to isolate it from other VLANs, ensuring
data security and reliability.

Logical port Logical ports are virtual ports created based on bond ports,
VLANs, or Ethernet ports. A unique IP address is allocated to
each logical port to carry host services.

Relationship Among Logical Ports, Ethernet Ports, VLANs, and Bond Ports
Logical ports can be created based on Ethernet ports, VLANs, or bond ports.
Figure 4-2 shows the relationship among logical ports, Ethernet ports, VLANs, and
bond ports.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Figure 4-2 Relationship among logical ports, Ethernet ports, VLANs, and bond
ports

Table 4-17 explains the meaning of each mark number in the preceding figure.

Table 4-17 Meanings of the mark numbers

Mark Number Description

1 Indicates that multiple Ethernet ports are bonded to form a

bond port.

2 Indicates that an Ethernet port is added to multiple VLANs.

3 Indicates that a bond port is added to multiple VLANs.

4 Indicates that a bond port is used to create multiple logical

ports.

5 Indicates that a VLAN port is used to create multiple logical

ports.

6 Indicates that an Ethernet port is used to create multiple

logical ports.

4.11.1.1 Creating a Bond Port

To increase link bandwidth and redundancy, you can bind multiple Ethernet ports
under the same controller.

Prerequisites
The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports you want to bond have been cleared.
Ethernet ports that have IP addresses cannot be bonded.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Context
Port bonding provides more bandwidth and higher redundancy for links. Although
ports are bonded, each session still transmits data through a single port and the
total bandwidth can be increased only when there are multiple sessions.
Determine whether to bond ports based on site requirements.

Port bonding has the following restrictions:

● Only Ethernet ports that have the same rate and are on the same controller
can be bonded. Ports cannot be bonded across controllers. Non-Ethernet ports
cannot be bonded.
● Link aggregation (IEEE 802.3ad) is supported.
● For the OceanStor Dorado 3000, OceanStor Dorado 5000, and OceanStor
Dorado 6000, the support for cross-card bonding is as follows:
– GE interface modules (not supporting TOE) support port bonding across
modules by default.
– 10GE, 25GE, 40GE, and 100GE interface modules (supporting TOE) do not
support port bonding across modules by default.
– The onboard network ports of OceanStor Dorado 3000 can be bonded
across interface modules and the port rates must be the same.
● For OceanStor Dorado 8000 and OceanStor Dorado 18000 in 6.1.3 or later,
interface modules in the same quadrant can be bonded across interface
modules, and the TOE function of the bonded ports must be disabled.

NOTICE

To disable the TOE function of the bonded ports, contact Huawei technical
support.
For versions earlier than 6.1.3, OceanStor Dorado 8000 and OceanStor Dorado
18000 do not support cross-card bonding.
For the OceanStor Dorado 8000 and OceanStor Dorado 18000, each interface
module can use only one bonding mode. That is, an interface module does
not allow bonding across modules and bonding within the module at the
same time.

● Read-only users are not allowed to bond Ethernet ports.

● Each Ethernet port can be added to only one bond port.
● A member port of a port group cannot be added to a bond port.
● Management network ports cannot be bonded.
● Member ports in the same bond port cannot connect to different switch
networks.
● After Ethernet ports are bonded, their MTU changes to the default value and
you need to configure the switch port mode. Take Huawei switches as an
example. You must set the ports on the Huawei switches to work in static
LACP mode.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

NOTICE

The link aggregation modes vary with switch manufacturers. If a switch from
another vendor is used, contact technical support of the switch manufacturer
for specific link aggregation configurations.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Bond Ports.

Step 2 Click Create.

The Create Bond Port page is displayed on the right.

Step 3 Set a bond name and select ports you want to bond.
1. Specify a name for the bond port in Name.
NOTE

The name must meet the following requirements:

– The value can contain only letters, digits, underscores (_), hyphens (-), and periods
(.).
– The name contains 1 to 31 characters.
2. Select the controller where the bond port resides.
3. In Available Ports, select one or more ports you want to bond.

Step 4 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
To configure an IP address for a bond port, run the change bond_port
ipv4_address bond_port_name=? ip=? mask=? or change bond_port
ipv6_address bond_port_name=? ip=? prefix_length=? command. For details
about this command, see the command reference specific to your product model.

Example:
admin:/>change bond_port ipv4_address bond_port_name=bond1 ip=192.168.1.1 mask=255.255.0.0
DANGER: You are about to change the IP address of port. This operation will disconnect the storage system
from hosts. This operation will also clear the configured routes on the IP address that is modified on this
port.
Suggestion:
1. Check whether there are redundant connections to hosts. If there are no redundant connections, stop
host services.
2. Ensure that the entered IP address is available.
Have you read danger alert message carefully?(y/n)y

Are you sure you really want to perform the operation?(y/n)y

Command executed successfully.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

4.11.1.2 Creating a VLAN

You can add Ethernet ports or bond ports to multiple independent VLANs.
Different services are configured in different VLANs to ensure the security and
reliability of service data.

Context
● VLANs are created on Ethernet or bond ports.
● VLANs cannot be created on the Ethernet ports that are configured with IP
addresses or carry services.
● A bond port instead of its member ports can be used to create a VLAN.
● The host ports and storage ports in the same VLAN must have the same
VLAN IDs.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > VLANs.
Step 2 Click Create.
The Create VLAN page is displayed on the right.
Step 3 In the Port Type drop-down list, select the type of the ports used to create VLANs.
Possible values are Ethernet Port and Bond Port.
Step 4 In the Home Port list, select a home port.
Step 5 In ID, specify the ID of a VLAN, and then click Add.
NOTE

● The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094. You can specify multiple VLAN IDs one by one or in
a batch. When creating multiple VLANs and specifying VLAN IDs in a batch, the VLAN
IDs are in the following format: Start VLAN ID-End VLAN ID.
● To delete a VLAN ID, click next to it.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
When creating a logical port based on a VLAN, ensure that the port type is VLAN
and the home port is the VLAN's home port.

4.11.1.3 Creating a Logical Port

A logical port is a virtual port that carries host services. It can be created on an
Ethernet port, a bond port, or a VLAN.

Context
Only logical ports that support iSCSI and NVMe over RoCE can be used to carry
block services. For iSCSI connections, select iSCSI as the data protocol for a logical
port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Logical Ports.

Step 2 Click Create.

The Create Logical Port page is displayed on the right.

Step 3 Set the parameters listed in Table 4-18.

Table 4-18 Logical port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the logical port.

The name must:
● Be unique.
● Contain only letters, digits, underscores (_), hyphens (-),
and periods (.).
● Contain 1 to 255 characters.

Role Roles of logical ports include the following:

Management: A port of this role is used by a vStore
administrator to log in to the system for management.
Service: A port of this role is used to access services.
Management + service: A port of this role is used to
access services or for a vStore administrator to log in to
the storage system for system management.
Replication: A port of this role is used for replication link
connection in remote replication or HyperMetro, or for
quorum link connection in HyperMetro.
NOTE
● For iSCSI connections, select Service.
● Only 6.1.3 and later versions support role types of
Management and Management + service.

Data Protocol Data protocol of the logical port. Possible values are NFS,
CIFS, NFS + CIFS, iSCSI, and NVMe over RoCE.
NOTE
● NFS, CIFS, and NFS + CIFS are applicable to file services. iSCSI
and NVMe over RoCE are applicable to block services.
● For iSCSI connections, select iSCSI.

IP Address Type IP address type of the logical port, which can be IPv4 or
IPv6.

IP Address IPv4 or IPv6 address of the logical port.

Subnet Mask Subnet mask of the logical port's IPv4 address.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when IP Address Type is set to
IPv4.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Prefix Prefix length of the logical port's IPv6 address.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when IP Address Type is set to
IPv6.

Gateway Gateway of the logical port's IP address.

Port Type Type of the logical port. Possible values are Ethernet Port,
Bond Port, and VLAN.
NOTE
This parameter takes the fixed value of VLAN when Data Protocol
is NVMe over RoCE.

Home Port Ethernet port, bond port, or VLAN to which the logical port
belongs.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

4.11.2 Configuring Connectivity

Context
● For Fibre Channel networks, you can choose the SCSI-port-based FC-SCSI
protocol or the NVMe-port-based FC-NVMe protocol.
● For 6.1.0 and later versions, the storage system supports the NVMe over RoCE
protocol.
● You can query the models, versions, and OSs of the application servers and
switches supported by the networks on the Huawei Storage Interoperability
Navigator.

Configuration Method
Verify that storage resources required by services have been successfully created
on the storage system. The storage resources include storage pools, LUNs, hosts,
and mappings between hosts/host groups and LUNs/LUN groups.
● Network using the iSCSI or FC-SCSI protocol
Configure the connectivity by following instructions in the "Configuring
Connectivity" in Host Connectivity Guide.

Table 4-19 Host connectivity guides for common operating systems

Host OS Host Connectivity Guide

AIX https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/doc/
EDOC1100113069

HP-UX https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/doc/
EDOC1100117891

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Host OS Host Connectivity Guide

Red Hat https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/doc/

EDOC1100113070

Solaris https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/doc/
EDOC1100113071

SUSE https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/doc/
EDOC1100117892

VMware ESXi https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/doc/

EDOC1100116456

Windows https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/doc/
EDOC1100116985

● Network using the FC-NVMe or NVMe over RoCE protocol

– For Linux hosts: Follow the instructions in the "Configuring Connectivity"
section in Host Connectivity Guide for Connecting to Linux Hosts
Using NVMe over Fabrics.
– For VMware ESXi hosts: Follow the instructions in the "Configuring
Connectivity" section in Host Connectivity Guide for Connecting to
VMware ESXi Hosts Using NVMe over Fabrics.

4.12 Using the Storage Space on an Application Server

After a connection is established between a storage system and an application
server, the application server must discover the newly-added logical disk (that is,
the storage space specified by a mapped LUN) to use it as a common disk for data
reads and writes.

Prerequisites
● The application server is communicating properly with the storage system.
● The planned storage capacity has been allocated to the application server.
● Multipathing software has been installed and configured for the application
server when redundant paths exist between the application server and the
storage system. This prevents multiple LUNs from being repetitively mapped
to the application server.
NOTE

● For details about how to install and configure UltraPath, Huawei-developed

multipathing software, refer to the UltraPath user guide specific to your operating
system. For details about how to configure OS native multipathing software, refer
to Host Connectivity Guide.
● If multipathing software is installed and configured after LUNs are mapped to the
application server, you must restart the application server for the multipathing
policies to take effect.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Precautions
● Do not allocate disks in use to other applications. Otherwise, data security
will be compromised.
● If a host login error occurs, operations on disks affect the running of
applications.
● If compatibility issues occur, use of the storage space on application servers
may be compromised.
● When unmapping a LUN, delete the residual information of the original
mapping on the host side to prevent exceptions. For details, see section
"FAQs" in the Host Connectivity Guide.

Context
The maximum LUN capacity that can be identified by an application server varies
according to the operating system and file system used by the application server.
Table 4-20 lists the maximum LUN capacity supported by various operating
systems.

Table 4-20 Maximum LUN capacity supported by various operating systems

Operating System File System Maximum Allowed LUN
Capacity

Windows Server 2003 New Technology File 2 TB

System (NTFS) NOTE
If a LUN mapped to a
Windows Server 2003-
based application server is
larger than 2 TB, convert it
into a GUID Partition Table
(GPT) disk.

Windows Server 2003 NTFS 256 TB

SP1 and later

Windows XP 32-bit NTFS 2 TB

Windows XP 64-bit NTFS 256 TB

Windows Server 2008 NTFS 256 TB

Windows 7 NTFS 256 TB

SUSE Linux Enterprise EXT3/ReiserFS/XFS 16 TB/16 TB/8 EB

Server

Red Hat Enterprise Linux EXT3/XFS 16 TB/100 TB

5

Red Hat Enterprise Linux EXT3/EXT4/XFS 16 TB/16 TB/100 TB

6

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

NOTE

● Plan the capacity of a LUN before mapping it to an application server. If the LUN
capacity exceeds the specifications, the application server will fail to identify the LUN.
● The above table lists the maximum LUN capacities supported by some common
operating systems. For the maximum LUN capacities of other operating systems, consult
technical support engineers. The actual specifications prevail.

Configuration Method
For details, see the Host Connectivity Guide.

4.13 More Configuration Scenarios

4.13.1 Configuring Basic Storage Services for VMware VVol

Virtual volume (VVol) is a new function in VMware ESXi 6.0. This section describes
how to configure basic storage services for VMware VVol.

Procedure
Step 1 Create a PE LUN and map it to a VMware ESXi host.
NOTE

● For details about how to configure basic storage services, such as creating a storage
pool, creating a PE LUN, creating a host, and mapping a PE LUN, see the corresponding
sections in this document.
● For details about how to configure the connectivity between a storage system and a
VMware ESXi host, see the Host Connectivity Guide.

Step 2 Configure the VVol function by following instructions in the eSDK Enterprise
Storage Plugins VASA user guide.
● Obtain the corresponding user guide.
a. Go to resource pages of eSDK Enterprise Storage Plugins.
Visit https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/, enter eSDK Enterprise
Storage Plugins in the search box, and select the automatically
associated path to go to the Documentation page.
b. Query the version mapping between the storage system and eSDK
Enterprise Storage Plugins and download the mapping VASA software
package.
i. On the Documentation page, obtain and view the eSDK Enterprise
Storage Plugins Version Mapping of the corresponding version.
ii. On the Software Download page, download the VASA software
package that matches the storage version and model.
c. On the Documentation page, download the eSDK Enterprise Storage
Plugins User Guide (VASA 2.0) that matches the storage version and
model.
● Perform the following operations by following instructions in the user guide:

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

a. Install VASA Provider.

b. Register the storage system and configure a storage container on the
eSDK Unified Management Portal.
c. Register VASA Provider with vCenter.

Step 3 Use a virtual datastore to create a VM.

1. Log in to vSphere Web Client.
2. In VM Storage Policies, configure data service rules.
3. If the vCenter is newly built, you need to create a data center.
4. In the vCenter, click Storage, right-click the vCenter data center, and choose
Related Objects > Datastores > . Create a datastore whose type is VVOL.

NOTE

GUIs may vary with software versions. The actual GUIs prevail.
5. Right-click the vCenter data center, choose New Virtual Machine > New
Virtual Machine, and select an appropriate VM storage policy and a VVol
datastore to create a VM.

----End

4.13.2 Configuring Storage Resources in Batches

Batch configuration, a function provided by DeviceManager, uses configuration
files to divide storage resources in batches to simplify resource management.

● Only the super administrator can use the batch configuration function.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

● During batch configuration, CLI commands are used. You can obtain
command reference of the related product to learn how to effectively use
these commands.

4.13.2.1 Configuration Process

Figure 4-3 shows the process for configuring the storage space in batches.

Figure 4-3 Batch configuration process

4.13.2.2 Preparing a Configuration File

Before configuring the storage space in batches, prepare a .conf configuration file
that contains commands to be executed in batches.

You can prepare a configuration file in either of the following ways:

1. Download the configuration file template provided by the storage system and
edit commands in the template as required.
2. If the project is planned and designed using LLDesigner, you can contact
Huawei engineers or Huawei certified resellers to provide the .conf
configuration file exported from LLDesigner.

4.13.2.2.1 Using a Configuration File Template

Prerequisites
DeviceManager is properly communicating with the storage system.

Context
● The exported default configuration file template is named Example.conf.
● The configuration file template downloaded from DeviceManager is in the
ANSI encoding format.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Procedure

Step 1 In the upper right corner of the home page, choose > Batch Configure.

Step 2 Download the configuration file template.

1. Click Configuration File Template.
A file download dialog box is displayed. The following example is based on
Internet Explorer 11.
2. Click Save As.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
3. Set the save path and file name.
4. Click Save.

----End

4.13.2.2.2 Using a Configuration File Exported from LLDesigner

If the project is planned and designed using LLDesigner, you can contact Huawei
engineers or Huawei certified resellers to provide the .conf configuration file
exported from LLDesigner.

4.13.2.3 Importing a Configuration File

This operation enables you to import a service configuration file.

Prerequisites
Only configuration files not being executed can be imported.

Context
● If a configuration file fails system check or is not executed during the import
process, only the administrator who imports the configuration file can import
a new configuration file.
● The latest imported configuration file will overwrite the earlier configuration
file.
● The configuration file to be imported cannot be larger than 100 KB.

Procedure

Step 1 In Service Configuration File, click .

Step 2 Select the desired configuration file and click Open.

The selected configuration file is displayed in the file selection area.

Step 3 Click Upload.

Message Configuration file uploaded successfully is displayed.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 4 Configuring Basic Storage Services

Follow-up Procedure
After a configuration file is uploaded, the storage system automatically verifies the
commands in the configuration file.
● If the verification is passed, the system displays the message Configuration
file uploaded successfully. You can start the batch configuration.
● If the verification fails, the system displays an error message. You need to
modify the configuration file.

4.13.2.4 Implementing Batch Configuration

This operation enables a storage system to automatically allocate storage
resources based on the parameters in the configuration file to improve the storage
resource configuration efficiency.

Prerequisites
A configuration file has been imported.

Context
● The offline configuration command can be executed only by the user who
imports the configuration file.
● If the user logs out during the command execution, the storage system
immediately stops the offline configuration.
● The storage system executes the commands included in the configuration file
one by one.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Execute to implement batch configuration.
When the progress reaches 100%, the operation is successful.

NOTE

During the execution, you can click Stop to stop the configuration.

Step 2 Click Close.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

5 Managing Basic Storage Services

This chapter describes how to manage basic storage services on DeviceManager.

5.1 Managing the Service Network
This section describes how to manage the service network of the storage system.
5.2 Managing Ports on Controller Enclosures
You can manage controller enclosures and their components including controllers
and interface modules, as well as configure parameters for these components.
5.3 Managing Storage Pools
5.4 Managing LUNs
5.5 Managing LUN Groups
5.6 Managing VVol
5.7 Managing Hosts
5.8 Managing Initiators
5.9 Managing Host Groups
5.10 Managing Port Groups
5.11 Viewing a Mapping View

5.1 Managing the Service Network

This section describes how to manage the service network of the storage system.

5.1.1 Managing the FC Network

This section describes how to manage the FC network of the storage system.

5.1.1.1 Viewing FC Network Information

This operation enables you to view information about the FC network.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > FC Network.
Step 2 View information about the FC network in the function pane. Table 5-1 describes
the parameters.

Table 5-1 FC network parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of an FC port.

Location Location of an FC port.

ID ID of an FC port.

Health Status Health status of an FC port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Normal: Functions and running performance of the
port are normal and without error.
● Bit errors found: Bit errors occur when the port
transmits data.
● Faulty: The port is functioning improperly and cannot
work normally.

Running Status Running status of an FC port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: A cable is connected to the port.
● Link down: No cable is connected to the port.

WWPN WWPN of an FC port.

Working Rate Data transmission rate of an FC port.

(Gbit/s)

Max. Working Maximum data transmission rate of an FC port.

Rate (Gbit/s)

Operation Mode Operation mode of an FC port.

Port State Isolation status of an FC port. Possible values are Enabled

and Disabled. A port cannot be used if its Port State is
Disabled.

Initiators Number of initiators connected to an FC port.

Port Protocol Protocol used by an FC port.

Immediate Data Indicates whether the immediate data function is enabled

for the FC port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Click the name of a port to view its details, including Summary, Initiators, and Owning
Port Groups.

----End

5.1.1.2 Modifying an FC Port

When the networking mode between a storage device and an application server
changes, modify the parameters of the FC port to ensure proper communication
between them.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > FC Network.

Step 2 Click the name of the desired FC port. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, click Modify.

The Modify page is displayed.

Step 3 In Configured Rate (Gbit/s), select a data transmission rate for the FC port.

NOTICE

● The FC port must have the same rate and mode as the HBA port on the
application server to prevent a communication failure.
● When two storage systems are interconnected by FC ports, ensure that the
rates and modes of the FC ports are the same on the two storage systems.
Using different rates or modes may cause communication failure.

The rate of an FC port can be 2 Gbit/s, 4 Gbit/s, 8 Gbit/s, 16 Gbit/s, 32 Gbit/s, or

self-adaptive. Select a correct value after obtaining necessary information.

NOTE

● If the maximum rate of the port is 4 Gbit/s, you can set the value to 2 Gbit/s or 4 Gbit/s.
● If the maximum rate of the port is 8 Gbit/s, you can set the value to 2 Gbit/s, 4 Gbit/s,
or 8 Gbit/s.
● If the maximum rate of the port is 16 Gbit/s, you can set the value to 4 Gbit/s, 8 Gbit/s,
or 16 Gbit/s.
● If the maximum rate of the port is 32 Gbit/s, you can set the value to 8 Gbit/s, 16 Gbit/s,
or 32 Gbit/s.
● If the value is set to Self-adaptive, the interconnected FC ports negotiate the rate
automatically. If the negotiated rates do not match, modify the rate manually.

Step 4 In Port Protocol, select FC-SCSI or FC-NVMe.

Step 5 Determine whether to enable Immediate Data. In scenarios where FC replication

links are used to transmit service data between storage arrays, the Immediate
Data function can improve the data transmission performance. You are advised to
enable this function.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.1.1.3 Viewing Bit Error Statistics

A port's bit error statistics reflect the data transmission efficiency of this port. A
high bit error rate compromises the read and write performance of the application
server using this port.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > FC Network.

Step 2 Click Bit Error Statistics.

The Bit Error Statistics page is displayed on the right.

Step 3 Query the bit error statistics of the Fibre Channel ports.
NOTE

You can click Clear to clear bit error statistics.

----End

5.1.2 Managing the Ethernet Network

This section describes how to manage the Ethernet network of the storage system.

5.1.2.1 Managing Ethernet Ports

This section describes how to manage Ethernet ports.

5.1.2.1.1 Viewing Ethernet Ports

This operation enables you to view information about Ethernet ports.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Ethernet Ports.

Step 2 View information about Ethernet ports in the function pane. Table 5-2 describes
the parameters.

Table 5-2 Ethernet port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of an Ethernet port.

Location Location of an Ethernet port.

ID ID of an Ethernet port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Health Status Health status of an Ethernet port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Normal: Functions and running performance of the
Ethernet port are normal and without error.
● Bit errors found: Bit errors occur when the port
transmits data.
● Faulty: The Ethernet port is functioning improperly and
cannot work normally.

Running Status Running status of an Ethernet port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: A cable is connected to the port.
● Link down: No cable is connected to the port.
● To be recovered: For a 4 U device, if the owning
controller of a port is faulty, the running status of the
port is To be recovered.

MAC Address MAC address of an Ethernet port.

IPv4 Address/ IPv4 address and subnet mask of an Ethernet port.

Subnet Mask

IPv6 Address/Prefix IPv6 address and prefix length of an Ethernet port.

Working Rate Data transmission rate of an Ethernet port.

(Gbit/s)

Max. Working Maximum data transmission rate of an Ethernet port.

Rate (Gbit/s)

MTU (Bytes) Maximum size of a data packet that can be transferred

between an Ethernet port and an application server.

Bond Name Bond name of an Ethernet port.

Logical Type Logical type of an Ethernet port. Possible values are Front-
end port, Management port, Maintenance port,
Expansion port, Scale-out interconnect port, Container
front-end port, and Container back-end port.

Port State State of an Ethernet port. An Ethernet port disconnects

after it is disabled.

Initiators Number of initiators connected to an Ethernet port.

NOTE

You can click the name of an Ethernet port to view its details.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

5.1.2.1.2 Viewing Bit Error Statistics

A port's bit error statistics reflect the data transmission efficiency of this port. A
high bit error rate compromises the read and write performance of the application
server using this port.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Ethernet Ports.

Step 2 Click Bit Error Statistics.

The Bit Error Statistics page is displayed on the right.

Step 3 Query the bit error statistics of the Ethernet ports.

NOTE

You can click Clear to clear bit error statistics.

----End

5.1.2.1.3 Configuring LLDP

By configuring LLDP on devices, you can obtain detailed information about the
network devices, such as topology and interface status.

Prerequisites
● The health status of the storage system is normal.
● The host or switch supports and has enabled the LLDP.

Context
● The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a standard Layer 2 topology
discovery protocol defined in IEEE 802.1ab. LLDP allows a device to send local
management information such as management IP address, device ID, and
port ID to neighbors. Neighbors save the received information in their
management information bases (MIBs). The network management system
(NMS) can search required information in MIBs to determine link status.
● If the host or switch connected to the front-end service port of the storage
system also supports the LLDP, the host or switch can discover the port
information of the storage system through the LLDP.
● For Ethernet ports on a 4 U device, only their owning controller sends LLDP
packets. In addition, the peer device only displays the neighbor information of
the owning controller. If the owning controller of the port is faulty, the port
does not send LLDP packets.

Precautions
Only storage systems of 6.1.3 and later versions support link discovery between
storage systems and switches through the LLDP.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 In developer mode, run the change system lldp working_mode=? command to
change the LLDP working mode.

In the preceding command, the default value of the working_mode field is

lldp_mode_disable. Its value can be any of the following:

1. lldp_mode_disable: indicates that LLDP packets can neither be sent nor

received.
2. lldp_mode_tx: indicates that LLDP packets can only be sent.
3. lldp_mode_rx: indicates that LLDP packets can only be received.
4. lldp_mode_txrx: indicates that LLDP packets can be sent and received.

Example:
developer:/>change system lldp working_mode=lldp_mode_txrx
WARNING: You are about to change the LLDP working mode.
After the working mode of the LLDP protocol is changed, the host or switch may discover the array port
information through the LLDP protocol, and the host or switch information may also be discovered by the
array through the LLDP protocol.
Suggestion: Before performing this operation, ensure that you want to perform this operation.
Have you read warning message carefully?(y/n)y
Are you sure you really want to perform the operation?(y/n)y
Command executed successfully.

NOTE

You can run the change user_mode current_mode user_mode=developer command to

enter the developer mode.

Step 2 In developer mode, run the show system lldp command to check whether the
LLDP working mode is successfully changed.

Example:
developer:/>show system lldp
Working Mode : lldp_mode_txrx

----End

5.1.2.2 Managing Bond Ports

This section describes how to manage bond ports.

5.1.2.2.1 Viewing Bond Ports

This operation enables you to view information about bond ports.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Bond Ports.

Step 2 View information about bond ports in the function pane. Table 5-3 describes the
parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-3 Bond port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a bond port.

ID ID of a bond port.

Health Status Health status of a bond port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Normal: Functions and running performance of the
port are normal and without error.
● Faulty: The port is functioning improperly and cannot
work normally.
● Partially damaged: The bond port has a faulty
member port.

Running Status Running status of a bond port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: A cable is connected to a member port.
● Link down: No cable is connected to a member port.
● To be recovered: For a 4 U device, if the owning
controller of a port is faulty, the running status of the
port is To be recovered.

IPv4 Address/ IPv4 address and subnet mask of a bond port.

Subnet Mask

IPv6 Address/Prefix IPv6 address and prefix length of a bond port.

MTU (Bytes) Maximum size of a data packet that can be transferred

between a bond port and an application server.

Ports Number of ports bonded to a bond port.

Initiators Number of initiators connected to a bond port.

NOTE

You can click the name of a bond port to view its details and modify it.

----End

5.1.2.2.2 Modifying a Bond Port

This operation enables you to modify a bond port.

Prerequisites
● A bond port has been created.
● After the MTU is changed to a non-default value, ensure that the MTU is the
same as that of the peer device (switch or network adapter).

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Bond Ports.
Step 2 Click More on the right of the desired bond port and select Modify.
The Modify page is displayed.

NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired port. In the upper right corner of the page that
is displayed, select Modify from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 3 Set MTU (Bytes) of the bond port. The value ranges from 1280 to 9000.
Step 4 In Logical Port, specify Name, IP Address, and Subnet Mask/Prefix of a logical
port bonded to the bond port.
NOTE

You can click to add more ports to the bond port.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

5.1.2.2.3 Deleting a Bond Port

This operation enables you to delete a bond port.

Prerequisites
● All services on the bond port to be deleted have been stopped.
● No VLAN or logical port is created for the bond port to be deleted.

Precautions
After a bond port is deleted, the IP addresses of the bonded Ethernet ports are
cleared. You must reset IP addresses for the Ethernet ports if needed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Bond Ports.
Step 2 Select one or more desired bond ports and click Delete.
NOTE

You can also click More on the right of a desired bond port and select Delete.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.1.2.3 Managing VLANs

This section describes how to add Ethernet ports or bond ports in the storage
system to multiple independent VLANs. You can configure different services in
different VLANs to ensure the security and reliability of service data.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

5.1.2.3.1 Viewing VLANs

This operation enables you to view information about created VLANs.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > VLANs.
Step 2 View information about VLANs in the function pane. Table 5-4 describes the
parameters.

Table 5-4 VLAN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a VLAN.

ID ID of a VLAN.

Running Status Running status of a VLAN.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the VLAN
status.
● Link up: The running status of the home port of a
VLAN is link up.
● Link down: The running status of the home port of a
VLAN is link down.
● To be recovered: When the home port of a VLAN is
in the To be recovered state, the running status of
the VLAN is refreshed to To be recovered.

MTU (Bytes) Maximum transmission unit of a VLAN.

----End

5.1.2.3.2 Modifying a VLAN

This operation enables you to modify a VLAN.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > VLANs.
Step 2 Click More on the right of the desired VLAN and select Modify.
The Modify VLAN page is displayed.
Step 3 Set MTU (Bytes).
Step 4 Click OK.

----End

5.1.2.3.3 Deleting a VLAN

This operation enables you to delete an unnecessary VLAN.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Prerequisites
All services in the VLAN to be deleted have been stopped.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > VLANs.
Step 2 Select one or more desired VLANs and click Delete.
NOTE

You can also click More on the right of a desired VLAN and select Delete.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.1.3 Managing Logical Ports

This section describes how to manage logical ports. A logical port is created based
on an Ethernet port, a bond port, or a VLAN.

5.1.3.1 Viewing Logical Ports

This section describes how to view information about logical ports.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Logical Ports.
Step 2 View information about logical ports in the function pane. Table 5-5 describes the
parameters.

Table 5-5 Logical port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a logical port.

ID ID of a logical port.

Owning vStore Name of the vStore to which a logical port belongs.

vStore ID ID of the vStore to which a logical port belongs.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Running Status Running status of a logical port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: The running status of the home port of a
logical port is link up.
● Link down: The running status of the home port of a
logical port is link down.
● Standby: In a HyperMetro scenario, when a logical port
works at the owning site of the primary or secondary
end, the running status of the logical port at the non-
owning site of the peer end is Standby.
● To be recovered: When the home port of a logical port
is in the To be recovered state or a logical port used for
the file service fails to be failed over, the running status
of the logical port changes to To be recovered.

Activation Status Indicates whether a logical port is activated.

Role Role of a logical port.

Data Protocol Data protocol of a logical port. In block service scenarios,

the data protocol of logical ports can be iSCSI or NVMe
over RoCE.

IP Address IP address of a logical port.

Subnet Mask/ Subnet mask of a logical port's IPv4 address or prefix

Prefix length of a logical port's IPv6 address.

Gateway Gateway of a logical port's IP address.

Home Port/ Home port and current port of a logical port.

Current Port

Home Controller/ Home controller and current controller of a logical port.

Current Controller

Failover Group In block service scenarios, the value is --.

NOTE

You can click the name of a logical port to view its details and manage it.

----End

5.1.3.2 Modifying a Logical Port

This section describes how to modify a logical port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Logical Ports.

Step 2 Click More on the right of the desired logical port and select Modify.

The Modify Logical Port page is displayed.

Step 3 Set the parameters listed in Table 5-6.

Table 5-6 Logical port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the logical port.

The name must meet the following requirements:
● The name must be unique.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, underscores
(_), hyphens (-), and periods (.).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

IP Address Type IP address type of the logical port, which can be IPv4 or
IPv6.

IP Address IPv4 or IPv6 address of the logical port.

Subnet Mask Subnet mask of the logical port's IPv4 address.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when IP Address Type is set to
IPv4.

Prefix Prefix length of the logical port's IPv6 address.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when IP Address Type is set to
IPv6.

Gateway Gateway of the logical port's IP address.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

5.1.3.3 Managing Routes

This section describes how to configure route information for a logical port.

Prerequisites
A logical port has been configured with an IP address.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Logical Ports.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
Step 3 Select the desired logical port and click Manage Route.
The Manage Route dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Manage Route page:
● Click More on the right of the desired logical port and select Manage Route.
● Click the name of the desired logical port. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, click Manage Route from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Configure the route information for the logical port.

1. In the IP Address drop-down list, select the IP address of the logical port for
which you want to add a route.
2. Click Add.
3. Set the parameters listed in Table 5-7.

Table 5-7 Route parameters

Paramete Description
r

Type Three types of routes are available:

– Default route
A route through which data is forwarded by default if no
preferred route is available. The destination address and
mask (IPv4) or prefix (IPv6) of the default route are
automatically set to 0. To use this option, you only need to
add a gateway.
– Host route
A route to a host. The destination mask (IPv4) or prefix
(IPv6) of the host route are automatically set to
255.255.255.255 or 128. To use this option, you only need to
add the destination address and gateway.
– Network segment route
A route to a network segment. You must add the
destination address, destination mask (IPv4) or prefix
(IPv6), and gateway.

Destinatio IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or network segment of the

n Address destination service network port on the application server or
destination logical port on another storage system.

Subnet Subnet mask of the IPv4 address or prefix of the IPv6 address
Mask/ for the destination service network port on the application
Prefix server or destination logical port on another storage system.

Gateway Gateway where the local logical port's IP address resides.

NOTE
The IP address of the gateway must be different from all internal
heartbeat IP addresses. Otherwise, routing will fail.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

4. Click . The route information is added to the list.

NOTE

Click on the right of a desired route to delete it.

Step 5 Click Close.

----End

5.1.3.4 Failing Back a Logical Port

After a fault of the home port is rectified, you can fail back services to the home
port.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Logical Ports.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
Step 3 Select the desired logical port and click Fail Back.
NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to fail back a logical port:
● Click More on the right of the desired logical port, and select Fail Back.
● Click the name of the desired logical port. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, click Fail Back from the Operation drop-down list.

----End

5.1.3.5 Deleting a Logical Port

This section describes how to delete a logical port that is no longer used.

Prerequisites
All services on the logical port to be deleted have been stopped.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > Logical Ports.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
Step 3 Select one or more desired logical ports and click Delete.
NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to delete a logical port:

● Click More on the right of the desired logical port, and select Delete.
● Click the name of the desired logical port. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, click Delete from the Operation drop-down list.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

5.1.4 Managing the RoCE Network

This section describes how to manage the RoCE network of the storage system.

5.1.4.1 Managing RoCE Ports

RoCE ports are used to connect a storage device with application servers, allowing
them to communicate with each other over RoCE networks. You can view or
modify parameters of RoCE ports as required.

5.1.4.1.1 Viewing RoCE Ports

This operation enables you to view information about RoCE ports.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > RoCE Ports.

Step 2 View information about RoCE ports in the function pane. Table 5-8 describes the
parameters.

Table 5-8 RoCE port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a RoCE port.

Location Location of a RoCE port.

ID ID of a RoCE port.

Health Status Health status of a RoCE port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Normal: Functions and running performance of the
port are normal and without error.
● Bit errors found: Bit errors occur when the port
transmits data.
● Faulty: The port is functioning improperly and cannot
work normally.

Running Status Running status of a RoCE port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: A cable is connected to the port.
● Link down: No cable is connected to the port.
● To be recovered: For a 4 U device, if the owning
controller of a port is faulty, the running status of the
port is To be recovered.

MAC Address MAC address of a RoCE port.

Working Rate Data transmission rate of a RoCE port.

(Gbit/s)

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Max. Working Maximum data transmission rate of a RoCE port.

Rate (Gbit/s)

MTU (Bytes) Maximum size of a data packet that can be transferred

between a RoCE port and an application server.

Logical Type Logical type of a RoCE port. Possible values are

Management port, Maintenance port, Expansion port,
Scale-out interconnection port, Container front-end
port, and Container back-end port.

Port State State of a RoCE port. A RoCE port will be disconnected

after it is disabled.

SNSD State of Storage Network Smart Discovery (SNSD). When

SNSD of a RoCE port is set to Enabled, hosts detect the
state changes of all logical ports of the RoCE port and
determine whether to automatically establish or cancel
connections based on logical port states.

Initiators Number of initiators connected to a RoCE port.

NOTE

You can click the name of a port to view its details, including Summary, Initiators, Owning
Port Groups, and VLANs.

----End

5.1.4.1.2 Modifying a RoCE Port

When the networking mode between a storage device and an application server
changes, modify the parameters of the RoCE port to ensure proper communication
between them.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > RoCE Ports.
Step 2 Click the name of the desired RoCE port. In the upper right corner of the page
that is displayed, click Modify.
The Modify page is displayed.
Step 3 In Working Mode, select a working mode for the RoCE port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

● This parameter may be invalid for some interface modules.

● The forward error correction (FEC) technology is used. With this technology, a sender
sends data with a certain redundancy error correction code, and a receiver performs
error detection on the received data according to the redundancy error correction code.
If an error is detected, the receiver can correct the error.
● The working mode varies according to the port type. The value can be Self-adaptive,
RSFEC, NOFEC, or BASEFEC.
● When the working mode of a port is set to Self-adaptive, it can automatically match
the FEC mode of the peer network device (such as a NIC or switch). In this case, if the
peer network device also has the self-adaptive capability enabled, the link negotiation
time may be prolonged.
● When the working mode of a port is set to RSFEC, NOFEC, or BASEFEC, ensure that the
mode matches the FEC mode of the peer network device. Before setting the working
mode, you are advised to confirm it by referring to the product description of the peer
network device.

Step 4 In MTU (Bytes), enter a maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the packets
transmitted between the RoCE port and the application server.

Step 5 Determine whether to enable SNSD. When SNSD of a RoCE port is set to
Enabled, hosts detect the state changes of all logical ports of the RoCE port and
determine whether to automatically establish or cancel connections based on
logical port states.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.1.4.1.3 Batch Setting SNSD

This section describes how to enable or disable SNSD for RoCE ports in a batch.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > RoCE Ports.

Step 2 Select desired RoCE ports and click Batch Set SNSD. Then select Batch Enable
SNSD or Batch Disable SNSD.
NOTE

When SNSD of a RoCE port is set to Enabled, hosts detect the state changes of all logical
ports of the RoCE port and determine whether to automatically establish or cancel
connections based on logical port states.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.1.4.1.4 Viewing Bit Error Statistics

A port's bit error statistics reflect the data transmission efficiency of this port. A
high bit error rate compromises the read and write performance of the application
server using the port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > RoCE Ports.

Step 2 Click Bit Error Statistics.

The Bit Error Statistics page is displayed on the right.

Step 3 Query the bit error statistics of the RoCE ports.

NOTE

You can click Clear to clear bit error statistics.

----End

5.1.4.2 Managing VLANs

This section describes how to add RoCE ports in the storage system to multiple
independent VLANs. You can configure different services in different VLANs to
ensure the security and reliability of service data.

5.1.4.2.1 Creating a VLAN

If the replication network is a RoCE network, you need to create a VLAN for each
RoCE port on both the local and remote devices.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager of the local and remote devices.

Step 2 Choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > VLANs.

Step 3 Click Create.

The Create VLAN page is displayed on the right.

Step 4 In the Home Port list, select a home port.

Step 5 In ID, specify the ID of a VLAN, and then click Add.

NOTE

● The same VLAN IDs must be configured for the interconnected replication ports on the
local device, remote device, and switch.
● The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094. You can specify multiple VLAN IDs one by one or in
a batch. When creating multiple VLANs and specifying VLAN IDs in a batch, the VLAN
IDs are in the following format: Start VLAN ID-End VLAN ID.
● To delete a VLAN ID, click next to it.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.1.4.2.2 Viewing VLANs

This operation enables you to view information about created VLANs.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > VLANs.
Step 2 View information about VLANs in the function pane. Table 5-9 describes the
parameters.

Table 5-9 VLAN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a VLAN.

ID ID of a VLAN.

Running Status Running status of a VLAN.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the VLAN
status.
● Link up: The running status of the home port of a
VLAN is link up.
● Link down: The running status of the home port of a
VLAN is link down.
● To be recovered: When the home port of a VLAN is
in the To be recovered state, the running status of
the VLAN is refreshed to To be recovered.

MTU (Bytes) Maximum transmission unit of a VLAN.

----End

5.1.4.2.3 Modifying a VLAN

This operation enables you to modify a VLAN.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > VLANs.
Step 2 Click More on the right of the desired VLAN and select Modify.
The Modify VLAN page is displayed.
Step 3 Set MTU (Bytes).
Step 4 Click OK.

----End

5.1.4.2.4 Deleting a VLAN

This operation enables you to delete an unnecessary VLAN.

Prerequisites
All services in the VLAN to be deleted have been stopped.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > VLANs.

Step 2 Select one or more desired VLANs and click Delete.

NOTE

You can also click More on the right of a desired VLAN and select Delete.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.2 Managing Ports on Controller Enclosures

You can manage controller enclosures and their components including controllers
and interface modules, as well as configure parameters for these components.

NOTE

Some device models may not support some interface modules. For details, visit
Specifications Query.

5.2.1 Managing Ethernet Ports

This section describes how to manage Ethernet ports.

5.2.1.1 Viewing Ethernet Ports

Ethernet ports are used to connect storage devices to application servers through
Ethernet links. This section describes how to view information about an Ethernet
port on a storage device.

Prerequisites
An Ethernet interface module has been properly installed on a controller.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.

Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired Ethernet port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view of the controller enclosure.

Step 4 Click the desired Ethernet port.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Ethernet Ports.

Step 5 View the Ethernet port information in the displayed Ethernet Port: Port location
page on the right or the table in the lower function pane.

Table 5-10 describes the parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-10 Ethernet port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the Ethernet port.

Location Location of the Ethernet port.

ID ID of the Ethernet port.

Health Status Health status of the Ethernet port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Normal: The Ethernet port is functioning properly.
● Bit errors found: Bit errors occur when the port
transmits data.
● Faulty: The Ethernet port is functioning improperly.

Running Status Running status of the Ethernet port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: A cable is connected to the port.
● Link down: No cable is connected to the port.
● To be recovered: For a 4 U device, if the owning
controller of a port is faulty, the running status of the
port is To be recovered.

MAC Address MAC address of the Ethernet port.

IPv4 Address/ IPv4 address and subnet mask of the Ethernet port.
Subnet Mask

IPv6 Address/ IPv6 address and prefix length of the Ethernet port.
Prefix

Working Rate Data transmission rate of the Ethernet port.

(Gbit/s)

Max. Working Maximum data transmission rate of the Ethernet port.

Rate (Gbit/s)

MTU (Bytes) Maximum size of a data packet that can be transferred

between the Ethernet port and the application server.

Bond Name Bond name of the Ethernet port.

Logical Type Logical type of the Ethernet port. Possible values are
Front-end port, Management port, Maintenance port,
Expansion port, Scale-out interconnect port, Container
front-end port, and Container back-end port.

Port State State of the Ethernet port. An Ethernet port will be

disconnected after it is disabled.

Initiators Number of initiators connected to the Ethernet port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Working Mode Working mode of the Ethernet port.

NOTE
● The forward error correction (FEC) technology is used. With this
technology, a sender sends data with a certain redundancy
error correction code, and a receiver performs error detection
on the received data according to the redundancy error
correction code. If an error is detected, the receiver can correct
the error.
● The working mode varies according to the port type. The value
can be Self-adaptive, RSFEC, NOFEC, or BASEFEC.

iSCSI Target Name Target name of the iSCSI network where the Ethernet port
resides.

NOTE

● Click the Initiators or Owning Port Groups tab to view the initiators or owning port
groups of the Ethernet port.
● If one or more bond ports have been created for the Ethernet port, you can click the
Bond Ports tab to view details of the bond ports.

----End

5.2.1.2 Modifying an Ethernet Port

When the networking mode between a storage device and an application server
changes, modify the parameters of Ethernet ports to ensure proper
communication between them.

Precautions
● Change the IP address of an Ethernet port only when necessary. Before
changing the IP address of an Ethernet port, either ensure that redundant
connections are available or stop services carried by this port.
● The IP address of an Ethernet port must be on a different network segment
from the internal heartbeat IP addresses.
The default IP addresses of internal heartbeat on a dual-controller storage
system are 127.127.127.10 and 127.127.127.11, and those on a four-controller
storage system are 127.127.127.10, 127.127.127.11, 127.127.127.12, and
127.127.127.13.
● Internal heartbeat links are established between controllers for the controllers
to detect each other's working status. Heartbeat links do not require separate
cable connections. The internal heartbeat IP addresses have been assigned
before delivery and cannot be changed.
● The IP address of an Ethernet port must not be in the same network segment
as that of a management network port.
● The IP address of an Ethernet port must not be in the same network segment
as that of a maintenance network port. The default IP address of the
maintenance network port must fall within the 172.31.XXX.XXX segment.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

● If an Ethernet port connects to an application server, the IP address of the

Ethernet port must be in the same network segment as that of the service
network port on the application server. If an Ethernet port connects to
another storage device, the IP address of the Ethernet port must be in the
same network segment as that of the peer Ethernet port on the other storage
device. If available IP addresses are insufficient for a network segment for
which you want to add an IP address, add routes.
● After Ethernet ports are bonded, their properties cannot be modified.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.

Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired Ethernet port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view.

Step 4 Click the desired Ethernet port.

The Ethernet Port: Port location page is displayed on the right.

Step 5 Modify the Ethernet port.

1. Click Modify in the upper right corner.
NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Ethernet
Ports and click the name of the desired Ethernet port. In the upper right corner of the
page that is displayed, click Modify.
2. In Working Mode, select a working mode for the Ethernet port.
NOTE

– This parameter may be invalid for some interface modules.

– The forward error correction (FEC) technology is used. With this technology, a
sender sends data with a certain redundancy error correction code, and a receiver
performs error detection on the received data according to the redundancy error
correction code. If an error is detected, the receiver can correct the error.
– The working mode varies according to the port type. The value can be Self-
adaptive, RSFEC, NOFEC, or BASEFEC.
– When the working mode of a port is set to Self-adaptive, it can automatically
match the FEC mode of the peer network device (such as a NIC or switch). In this
case, if the peer network device also has the self-adaptive capability enabled, the
link negotiation time may be prolonged.
– When the working mode of a port is set to RSFEC, NOFEC, or BASEFEC, ensure
that the mode matches the FEC mode of the peer network device. Before setting
the working mode, you are advised to confirm it by referring to the product
description of the peer network device.
– Retaining the default value is recommended. After modifying the port, verify that
its Running Status is Link up. If Running Status is Link down, select another
working mode to ensure that Running Status is Link up.
3. In MTU (Bytes), enter a maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the packets
transmitted between the Ethernet port and the application server.
4. In Logical Port, specify Name, IP Address, and Subnet Mask/Prefix of the
logical port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

You can click or to add or remove a logical port.

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.2.1.3 Modifying a Management Port

When the network changes, you must modify the parameters of the management
port to ensure proper communication between the storage system and the
maintenance terminal.

Context
Modifying the management port will interrupt the existing connection between
the storage system and the maintenance terminal.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.
Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired management port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view.

Step 4 Click the management port you want to modify.
The Ethernet Port: Port location page is displayed on the right.
Step 5 Modify the management port.
1. Click Modify in the upper right corner.
NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Ethernet
Ports and click the name of the desired management port. In the upper right corner
of the page that is displayed, click Modify.
2. Set the IPv4 address.
a. Set IPv4 Address for the management port.
b. Set Subnet Mask for the management port.
c. Set IPv4 Gateway for the management port.
3. Set the IPv6 address.
a. Set IPv6 Address for the management port.
b. Set Prefix for the management port.
c. Set IPv6 Gateway for the management port.
Step 6 Click OK.
Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

5.2.1.4 Viewing Bit Error Statistics

A port's bit error statistics reflect the data transfer efficiency of the port. A high bit
error rate compromises the read and write performance of the application server
using the port.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.
Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired Ethernet port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view.

Step 4 Click the desired Ethernet port.
Step 5 In the lower function pane, click Bit Error Statistics.
The Bit Error Statistics page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Ethernet Ports
and click Bit Error Statistics.

Step 6 Select Ethernet Port from the drop-down list in the upper-right corner.
Step 7 Query the bit error statistics in the port list.
NOTE

You can click Clear to clear bit error statistics.

----End

5.2.1.5 Managing Routes

If iSCSI networking is used and data needs to be transmitted across network
segments, you must configure routes.

Prerequisites
You have configured an IP address for an Ethernet port.

NOTE

If redundant links are configured, you must configure an IP address and routing information
for each involved Ethernet port.

Precautions
● The IP address of an Ethernet port must be on a different network segment
from the internal heartbeat IP addresses.
The default IP addresses of internal heartbeat on a dual-controller storage
system are 127.127.127.10 and 127.127.127.11, and those on a four-controller
storage system are 127.127.127.10, 127.127.127.11, 127.127.127.12, and
127.127.127.13.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

● Internal heartbeat links are established between controllers for the controllers
to detect each other's working status. Heartbeat links do not require separate
cable connections. The internal heartbeat IP addresses have been assigned
before delivery and cannot be changed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.
Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired Ethernet port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view.

Step 4 Select the Ethernet port you want to configure.
Step 5 Click Manage Route.
The Manage Route dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform any of the following operations to go to the Manage Route page:
● Click Manage Logical Port. On the Manage Logical Port page that is displayed, select
the desired logical port and click Manage Route.
● Choose Services > Network > Logical Ports.
– Select the desired logical port and click Manage Route.
– Click More on the right of the desired logical port and select Manage Route.

Step 6 Configure the route information for the Ethernet port.

1. In the IP Address drop-down list, select the IP address of the Ethernet port for
which you want to add a route.
2. Click Add.
3. Set the parameters listed in Table 5-11.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-11 Route parameters

Paramete Description
r

Type Three types of routes are available:

– Default route
A route through which data is forwarded by default if no
preferred route is available. The destination address and
mask (IPv4) or prefix (IPv6) of the default route are
automatically set to 0. To use this option, you only need to
add a gateway.
– Host route
A route to a host. The destination mask (IPv4) or prefix
(IPv6) of the host route are automatically set to
255.255.255.255 or 128. To use this option, you only need to
add the destination address and gateway.
– Network segment route
A route to a network segment. You must add the
destination address, destination mask (IPv4) or prefix
(IPv6), and gateway.

Destinatio IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or network segment of the

n Address destination service network port on the application server or
destination Ethernet port on another storage system.

Subnet Subnet mask of the IPv4 address or prefix of the IPv6 address
Mask/ for the destination service network port on the application
Prefix server or destination Ethernet port on another storage system.

Gateway Gateway where the local Ethernet port's IP address resides.

NOTE
The IP address of the gateway must be different from all internal
heartbeat IP addresses. Otherwise, routing will fail.

4. Click . The route information is added to the list.

NOTE

Click on the right of a desired route to delete it.

Step 7 Click Close.

----End

5.2.1.6 Modifying a Bond Port

This section describes how to modify the information about a bond port.

Prerequisites
● A bond port has been created.
● After the MTU is changed to a non-default value, ensure that the MTU is the
same as that of the peer device (switch or network adapter).

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.
Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired Ethernet port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view.

Step 4 Click an Ethernet port for which a bond port has been created.
The Ethernet Port: Port location page is displayed on the right.
Step 5 Click the Bond Port tab and click Modify in the upper right corner.
The Modify page is displayed.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Bond Ports. Click
More on the right of the desired bond port and select Modify.

Step 6 Set the MTU (Bytes) of the bond port. The value ranges from 1280 to 9000.
Step 7 In Logical Port, specify Name, IP Address, and Subnet Mask/Prefix of the logical
port.
NOTE

You can click to add more logical ports.

Step 8 Click OK.

----End

5.2.1.7 Canceling Ethernet Port Bonding

After canceling Ethernet port bonding, each Ethernet port functions as an
independent port.

Prerequisites
All services running on the Ethernet ports for which you want to cancel bonding
have been stopped. This is necessary because canceling Ethernet port bonding
interrupts ongoing services.

Precautions
After Ethernet port bonding is canceled, the IP addresses of the Ethernet ports are
cleared. You must reset IP addresses for the Ethernet ports if needed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.
Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired Ethernet port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 4 Select the desired Ethernet port.

Step 5 Click Cancel Bonding.
Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.2.1.8 Managing VLANs

This section describes how to add Ethernet ports or bond ports in the storage
system to multiple independent VLANs. You can configure different services in
different VLANs to ensure the security and reliability of service data.

Prerequisites
VLANs cannot be created on the Ethernet ports that are configured with IP
addresses or carry services.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.
Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired Ethernet port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view of the controller enclosure.

Step 4 Select the Ethernet port you want to configure.
Step 5 Click Manage VLAN.
The Manage VLAN page is displayed.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > VLANs.

Step 6 View the VLAN information.

Table 5-12 describes the parameters.

Table 5-12 VLAN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a VLAN.

ID ID of a VLAN.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Running Status Running status of a VLAN.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the VLAN
status.
● Link up: The running status of the home port of a
VLAN is link up.
● Link down: The running status of the home port of a
VLAN is link down.
● To be recovered: When the home port of a VLAN is
in the To be recovered state, the running status of
the VLAN is refreshed to To be recovered.

MTU (Bytes) Maximum transmission unit of a VLAN.

Step 7 Create, modify, or delete a VLAN.

● To create a VLAN:
a. Click Create.
The Create VLAN page is displayed.
b. Set Port Type. In the drop-down list, select the desired port type.
Possible values are Ethernet Port and Bond Port.
c. Select the desired Ethernet port or bond port from the port list in the
middle function pane.
d. In ID, specify the ID of a VLAN, and then click Add.
NOTE

▪ The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094. You can specify multiple VLAN IDs one
by one or in a batch. When creating multiple VLANs and specifying VLAN IDs
in a batch, the VLAN IDs are in the following format: Start VLAN ID-End
VLAN ID.

▪ To delete an ID, click next to it.

e. Click OK.
● To modify a VLAN:
a. Click More on the right of the desired VLAN and click Modify.
The Modify VLAN page is displayed.
b. Set MTU (Bytes).
NOTE

The size of a packet transmitted between a port and a host cannot exceed the
MTU of the Ethernet port.
c. Click OK.
● To delete a VLAN:
Select the desired VLAN and click Delete.
Confirm your operation as prompted.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

You can also click More on the right of the desired VLAN and select Delete.

----End

5.2.1.9 Viewing RDMA Ports

RDMA ports are used to interconnect controller enclosures as well as controller
enclosures and smart disk enclosures.

Prerequisites
An RDMA interface module has been correctly installed on a controller.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.
Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired RDMA port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view of the controller enclosure.

Step 4 Click the desired RDMA port.
NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Ethernet Ports.
In Logical Type, select Expansion port or Scale-out interconnect port to filter out desired
ports.

Step 5 View the RDMA port information on the page displayed on the right or in the
table in the lower function pane.
Table 5-13 describes the parameters.

Table 5-13 RDMA port information

Parameter Description

Logical Type Logical type of the RDMA port. Possible values include:
● Expansion port: connects a controller enclosure to a
smart disk enclosure.
● Scale-out interconnect port: connects controller
enclosures.

Health Status Health status of the RDMA port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Normal: Functions and running performance of the port
are normal and without error.
● Bit errors found: Bit errors occur when the port
transmits data.
● Faulty: The port is functioning improperly and cannot
work normally.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Running Status Working status of the RDMA port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: A cable is connected to the port.
● Link down: No cable is connected to the port.
● To be recovered: For a 4 U device, if the owning
controller of a port is faulty, the running status of the
port is To be recovered.

Working Rate Data transmission rate of the RDMA port.

(Gbit/s)

Max. Working Maximum data transmission rate of the RDMA port.

Rate (Gbit/s)

Working Mode Working mode of the RDMA port.

NOTE
● The forward error correction (FEC) technology is used. With this
technology, a sender sends data with a certain redundancy
error correction code, and a receiver performs error detection
on the received data according to the redundancy error
correction code. If an error is detected, the receiver can correct
the error.
● The working mode varies according to the port type. The value
can be Self-adaptive, RSFEC, NOFEC, or BASEFEC.

MAC Address MAC address of the RDMA port.

Port State State of the RDMA port. A port will be disconnected after it
is disabled.

MTU (Bytes) Maximum size of a data packet that can be transmitted

between the RDMA port and a controller enclosure or disk
enclosure.

----End

5.2.2 Managing SAS Ports

SAS ports are used to interconnect the storage device with disk enclosures. You
can view the parameters of SAS ports as required.

5.2.2.1 Viewing SAS Port Information

This section describes how to view information about a SAS port.

Prerequisites
A SAS interface module has been correctly installed on a controller.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.

Step 2 Click to switch to the rear view of the storage device.

Step 3 Click the desired SAS port.
Step 4 View the SAS port information in the displayed SAS Port: Port location page on
the right or the table in the lower function pane.
Table 5-14 describes the parameters.

Table 5-14 SAS port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the SAS port.

Location Location of the SAS port.

ID ID of the SAS port.

Health Status Health status of the SAS port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Normal: Functions and running performance of the port
are normal and without error.
● Bit errors found: Bit errors occur when the port
transmits data.
● Faulty: The port is functioning improperly and cannot
work normally.

Running Status Working status of the SAS port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: A cable is connected to the port.
● Link down: No cable is connected to the port.

WWPN WWPN of the SAS port.

Working Rate Data transmission rate of the SAS port.

(Gbit/s)

Max. Working Maximum data transmission rate of the SAS port.

Rate (Gbit/s)

Port State State of the SAS port. A port will be disconnected after it is
disabled.

Model Model of the SAS port.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

5.2.2.2 Viewing Bit Error Statistics

A port's bit error statistics reflect the data transfer efficiency of the port. A high bit
error rate compromises the read and write performance of the application server
using the port.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.

Step 2 Click to switch to the rear view.

Step 3 Click the desired SAS port.

Step 4 In the lower function pane, click Bit Error Statistics.

The Bit Error Statistics page is displayed on the right.

Step 5 Select SAS Port from the drop-down list in the upper-right corner.

Step 6 Query the bit error statistics in the port list.

NOTE

You can click Clear to clear bit error statistics.

----End

5.2.3 Managing FC Ports

FC ports are used to connect a storage device with application servers, allowing
them to communicate with each other over FC links. You can view or modify
parameters of FC ports as required.

5.2.3.1 Viewing FC Port Information

This section describes how to view information about an FC port.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.

Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired FC port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view of the storage device.

Step 4 Click the desired FC port.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > FC Network.

Step 5 View the FC port information on the page displayed on the right or in the table in
the lower function pane.

Table 5-15 describes the parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-15 FC port information

Parameter Description

Name Name of the FC port.

Location Location of the FC port.

ID ID of the FC port.

Health Status Health status of the FC port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Normal: Functions and running performance of the FC
port are normal and without error.
● Bit errors found: Bit errors occur when the port
transmits data.
● Faulty: The FC port is functioning improperly and
cannot work normally.

Running Status Working status of the FC port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: A cable is connected to the port.
● Link down: No cable is connected to the port.

WWPN WWPN of the FC port.

Configured Rate Configured rate of the FC port.

(Gbit/s)

Working Rate Data transmission rate of the FC port.

(Gbit/s)

Max. Working Maximum data transmission rate of the FC port.

Rate (Gbit/s)

Operation Mode Operation mode of the FC port.

● FC-AL: arbitrated loop.
● P2P: point to point.
● auto_adapt: auto-adaptation.

Port State Isolation status of the FC port. Possible values are Enabled
and Disabled. If Port State is Disabled, this port cannot
be used.

Initiators Number of initiators connected to the FC port.

Port Protocol Protocol used by the FC port.

Immediate Data Indicates whether the immediate data function is enabled

for the FC port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

You can click the Initiators tab on the displayed page to view detailed initiator information.

----End

5.2.3.2 Modifying an FC Port

When the networking mode between a storage device and an application server
changes, modify the parameters of the FC port to ensure proper communication
between them.

Context
Note the following when modifying the properties of an FC port:
● When a storage system uses an FC port to connect to an application server,
ensure that the rate of the FC port on the storage system is the same as that
of the HBA port on the application server. Using different rates may cause
communication failure between the storage system and application server.
● When two storage systems are interconnected by FC ports, ensure that the
rates of the FC ports are the same on the two storage systems. Using different
rates may cause communication failure.
● Do not modify the properties of an FC port when services are running because
modifying the properties will interrupt the communication on this port.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.
Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired FC port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view of the controller enclosure.

Step 4 Click the desired FC port.
The FC Port page is displayed.
Step 5 Modify the FC port.
1. Click Modify in the upper right corner.
NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > FC Network and click the name
of the desired FC port. In the upper right corner of the page that is displayed, click
Modify.
2. In Configured Rate (Gbit/s), select a data transmission rate for the FC port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTICE

– The FC port must have the same rate and mode as the HBA port on the
application server to prevent a communication failure.
– When two storage systems are interconnected by FC ports, ensure that the
rates and modes of the FC ports are the same on the two storage systems.
Using different rates or modes may cause communication failure.

The rate of an FC port can be 2 Gbit/s, 4 Gbit/s, 8 Gbit/s, 16 Gbit/s, 32 Gbit/s,

or self-adaptive. Select a correct value after obtaining necessary information.
NOTE

– If the maximum rate of the port is 4 Gbit/s, you can set the value to 2 Gbit/s or 4
Gbit/s.
– If the maximum rate of the port is 8 Gbit/s, you can set the value to 2 Gbit/s, 4
Gbit/s, or 8 Gbit/s.
– If the maximum rate of the port is 16 Gbit/s, you can set the value to 4 Gbit/s, 8
Gbit/s, or 16 Gbit/s.
– If the maximum rate of the port is 32 Gbit/s, you can set the value to 8 Gbit/s, 16
Gbit/s, or 32 Gbit/s.
– If the value is set to Self-adaptive, the interconnected FC ports negotiate the rate
automatically. If the negotiated rates do not match, modify the rate manually.
3. In Port Protocol, select FC-SCSI or FC-NVMe.
4. Determine whether to enable Immediate Data. In scenarios where FC
replication links are used to transmit service data between storage arrays, the
Immediate Data function can improve the data transmission performance.
You are advised to enable this function.
Step 6 Click OK.
Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.2.3.3 Viewing Bit Error Statistics

A port's bit error statistics reflect the data transmission efficiency of this port. A
high bit error rate compromises the read and write performance of the application
server using the port.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.
Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired FC port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view.

Step 4 Click the desired FC port.
Step 5 In the lower function pane, click Bit Error Statistics.
The Bit Error Statistics page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > FC Network and click Bit Error
Statistics.

Step 6 Query the bit error statistics of the FC ports.

1. Select FC Port from the drop-down list in the upper-right corner.
2. Query the bit error statistics in the port list.
NOTE

You can click Clear to clear bit error statistics.

----End

5.2.4 Managing RoCE Ports

RoCE ports are used to connect a storage device with application servers, allowing
them to communicate with each other over RoCE networks. You can view or
modify parameters of RoCE ports as required.

5.2.4.1 Viewing RoCE Ports

This operation enables you to view information about RoCE ports.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.

Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired RoCE port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view of the storage device.

Step 4 Click the desired RoCE port.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > RoCE Ports.

Step 5 View the RoCE port information on the page displayed on the right or in the table
in the lower function pane.

Table 5-16 describes the parameters.

Table 5-16 RoCE port information

Parameter Description

Name Name of the RoCE port.

Location Location of the RoCE port.

ID ID of the RoCE port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Health Status Health status of the RoCE port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Normal: Functions and running performance of the
RoCE port are normal and without error.
● Bit errors found: Bit errors occur when the port
transmits data.
● Faulty: The RoCE port is functioning improperly and
cannot work normally.

Running Status Working status of the RoCE port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: A cable is connected to the port.
● Link down: No cable is connected to the port.
● To be recovered: For a 4 U device, if the owning
controller of a port is faulty, the running status of the
port is To be recovered.

MAC Address MAC address of the RoCE port.

Working Rate Data transmission rate of the RoCE port.

(Gbit/s)

Max. Working Maximum data transmission rate of the RoCE port.

Rate (Gbit/s)

MTU (Bytes) Maximum size of a data packet that can be transferred

between the RoCE port and an application server.

Working Mode Working mode of the RoCE port.

NOTE
● The forward error correction (FEC) technology is used. With
this technology, a sender sends data with a certain redundancy
error correction code, and a receiver performs error detection
on the received data according to the redundancy error
correction code. If an error is detected, the receiver can correct
the error.
● The working mode varies according to the port type. The value
can be Self-adaptive, RSFEC, NOFEC, or BASEFEC.

Bond Name Bond name of the RoCE port.

Logical Type Logical type of a RoCE port. Possible values are

Management port, Maintenance port, Expansion port,
Scale-out interconnection port, Container front-end
port, and Container back-end port.

iSCSI Target Name Target name of the iSCSI network where the RoCE port
resides.

Port State State of the RoCE port. A RoCE port will be disconnected
after it is disabled.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Initiators Number of initiators connected to the RoCE port.

SNSD State of Storage Network Smart Discovery (SNSD). When

SNSD of a RoCE port is set to Enabled, hosts detect the
state changes of all logical ports of the RoCE port and
determine whether to automatically establish or cancel
connections based on logical port states.

NOTE

On the page displayed on the right, you can view information about Initiators, Owning
Port Groups, and VLANs.

----End

5.2.4.2 Modifying a RoCE Port

When the networking mode between a storage device and an application server
changes, modify the parameters of the RoCE port to ensure proper communication
between them.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.
Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired RoCE port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view.

Step 4 Click the desired RoCE port.
The RoCE Port page is displayed.
Step 5 Modify the RoCE port.
1. Click Modify in the upper right corner.
NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > RoCE Ports and
click the name of the desired RoCE port. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, click Modify.
2. In Working Mode, select a working mode for the RoCE port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

– This parameter may be invalid for some interface modules.

– The forward error correction (FEC) technology is used. With this technology, a
sender sends data with a certain redundancy error correction code, and a receiver
performs error detection on the received data according to the redundancy error
correction code. If an error is detected, the receiver can correct the error.
– The working mode varies according to the port type. The value can be Self-
adaptive, RSFEC, NOFEC, or BASEFEC.
– When the working mode of a port is set to Self-adaptive, it can automatically
match the FEC mode of the peer network device (such as a NIC or switch). In this
case, if the peer network device also has the self-adaptive capability enabled, the
link negotiation time may be prolonged.
– When the working mode of a port is set to RSFEC, NOFEC, or BASEFEC, ensure
that the mode matches the FEC mode of the peer network device. Before setting
the working mode, you are advised to confirm it by referring to the product
description of the peer network device.
– Retaining the default value is recommended. After modifying the port, verify that
its Running Status is Link up. If Running Status is Link down, select another
working mode to ensure that Running Status is Link up.
3. In MTU (Bytes), enter a maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the packets
transmitted between the RoCE port and the application server.
4. Determine whether to enable SNSD. When SNSD of a RoCE port is set to
Enabled, hosts detect the state changes of all logical ports of the RoCE port
and determine whether to automatically establish or cancel connections
based on logical port states.

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.2.4.3 Batch Setting SNSD

This section describes how to enable or disable SNSD for RoCE ports in a batch.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > RoCE Ports.

Step 2 Select desired RoCE ports and click Batch Set SNSD. Then select Batch Enable
SNSD or Batch Disable SNSD.
NOTE

When SNSD of a RoCE port is set to Enabled, hosts detect the state changes of all logical
ports of the RoCE port and determine whether to automatically establish or cancel
connections based on logical port states.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

5.2.4.4 Viewing Bit Error Statistics

A port's bit error statistics reflect the data transmission efficiency of this port. A
high bit error rate compromises the read and write performance of the application
server using the port.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.

Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired RoCE port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view.

Step 4 Click the desired RoCE port.

Step 5 In the lower function pane, click Bit Error Statistics.

The Bit Error Statistics page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > RoCE Ports and click
Bit Error Statistics.

Step 6 Select RoCE Port from the drop-down list in the upper-right corner.

Step 7 Query the bit error statistics in the port list.

NOTE

You can click Clear to clear bit error statistics.

----End

5.2.4.5 Managing VLANs

This section describes how to add RoCE ports in the storage system to multiple
independent VLANs. You can configure different services in different VLANs to
ensure the security and reliability of service data.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.

Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired RoCE port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view of the controller enclosure.

Step 4 Click the desired RoCE port.

Step 5 Click Manage VLAN.

The Manage VLAN page is displayed.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose Services > Network > RoCE Network > VLANs.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 6 View the VLAN information.

Table 5-17 describes the parameters.

Table 5-17 VLAN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a VLAN.

ID ID of a VLAN.

Running Status Running status of a VLAN.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the VLAN
status.
● Link up: The running status of the home port of a
VLAN is link up.
● Link down: The running status of the home port of a
VLAN is link down.
● To be recovered: When the home port of a VLAN is
in the To be recovered state, the running status of
the VLAN is refreshed to To be recovered.

MTU (Bytes) Maximum transmission unit of a VLAN.

Step 7 Create, modify, or delete a VLAN.

● To create a VLAN:
a. Click Create.
The Create VLAN page is displayed.
b. In the Home Port list, select a home port.
c. In ID, specify the ID of a VLAN, and then click Add.
NOTE

▪ The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094. You can specify multiple VLAN IDs one
by one or in a batch. When creating multiple VLANs and specifying VLAN IDs
in a batch, the VLAN IDs are in the following format: Start VLAN ID-End
VLAN ID.

▪ To delete an ID, click next to it.

d. Click OK.
● To modify a VLAN:
a. Click More on the right of the desired VLAN and click Modify.
The Modify VLAN page is displayed.
b. Set MTU (Bytes).
NOTE

The size of a packet transmitted between a port and a host cannot exceed the
MTU of the RoCE port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

c. Click OK.
● To delete a VLAN:
Select the desired VLAN and click Delete.
Confirm your operation as prompted.
NOTE

You can also click More on the right of the desired VLAN and select Delete.

----End

5.3 Managing Storage Pools

This section describes how to manage storage pools.

5.3.1 Viewing Storage Pool Information

This section describes how to view basic information about storage pools.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Storage Pools.
Step 2 View the storage pool information in the function pane. Table 5-18 describes the
parameters.

Table 5-18 Storage pool parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the storage pool.

NOTE
You can click the name of a storage pool to view its details and
manage it.

ID ID of the storage pool.

Health Status Health status of the storage pool.

Running Status Running status of the storage pool.

Total Usable capacity of a storage pool (Total physical capacity of

disks – Capacity consumed by RAID and metadata).
NOTE
If a storage pool is created on the CLI and has been configured with
the capacity during the creation, the configured capacity is displayed
in Total. However, the actual capacity that can be used is the total
physical capacity of all disks.

Used Sum of the allocated capacity and data protection capacity

of a storage pool.
NOTE
It is recommended that the used capacity of a storage pool should
not exceed 85% of the total capacity. If the usage exceeds 85%, you
are advised to expand the storage pool.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Free Free capacity = Total capacity – Used capacity

Data Protection Total capacity of all LUNs and file systems for data
protection in a storage pool.
NOTE
For example, if snapshots are created for LUNs in the storage pool,
the space occupied by the activated snapshots is the data protection
capacity.

Data Reduction Total amount of user data written to the storage pool
divided by the storage pool's used capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when SmartDedupe and
SmartCompression licenses are imported to the storage system.

Data Reduction Total amount of block data written to the storage pool
Ratio for Block divided by the storage pool's used block capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when SmartDedupe and
SmartCompression licenses are imported to the storage system.

Data Reduction Total amount of file data written to the storage pool divided
Ratio for File by the storage pool's used file capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when SmartDedupe and
SmartCompression licenses are imported to the storage system and
the product model supports file systems.

Thin Space Calculation formula:

Saving Thin space saving rate = (Total subscribed capacity – Used
subscribed capacity)/Total subscribed capacity
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when SmartDedupe and
SmartCompression licenses are imported to the storage system.

Overall Space Space saving ratio of a storage pool. (Total subscribed

Saving capacity/Used subscribed capacity) x Data reduction ratio
NOTE
If the percentage of all LUNs' available capacity to their total
configured capacity is lower than 1%, the available capacity is
considered as 1% of the configured capacity.
This parameter is valid only when SmartDedupe and
SmartCompression licenses are imported to the storage system.

Total Subscribed Total capacity of all LUNs and file systems in a storage pool.
NOTE
If the current device model does not support file systems, the total
subscribed capacity is the total capacity configured for all LUNs in a
storage pool.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Used Subscribed Total amount of data that has been written to all LUNs and
file systems in a storage pool.
NOTE
If the current device model does not support file systems, the used
subscribed capacity is the total amount of data that has been written
to all LUNs in a storage pool.

Free Subscribed Free subscribed capacity = Total subscribed capacity – Used

subscribed capacity

Step 3 (Optional) Click the name of a storage pool to query its summary and disk
information.

----End

5.3.2 Expanding a Storage Pool

When the capacity of a storage pool is insufficient, you can expand the storage
pool to meet capacity requirements.

Capacity Expansion Method

For details, see the administrator guide specific to your product model and version.

5.3.3 Updating Keys

For storage pools with data encryption enabled, you are advised to periodically
update keys for security purpose.

Key Update Method

For details, see the disk encryption user guide specific to your product model and
version.

5.3.4 Configuring a Space Reclamation Policy

A background space reclamation task clears junk fingerprints in a disk domain to
ensure service stability. By configuring a space reclamation policy, you can set the
execution time of a background space reclamation task to be within the service
idle period to reduce the impact on service performance.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Storage Pools.
Step 2 Click Set Space Reclamation Policy.
The Set Space Reclamation Policy dialog box is displayed on the right.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the space reclamation policy.
Table 5-19 describes the parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-19 Space reclamation policy parameters

Parameter Description

Executed On Execution frequency of the space reclamation task. Possible

options are:
● Monday to Friday: Space is reclaimed at a fixed time
every day from Monday to Friday.
● Saturday and Sunday: Space is reclaimed at a fixed time
every day on Saturday and Sunday.
● Every day: Space is reclaimed at a fixed time every day.
NOTE
The specific time is specified by Start Time and End Time.

Start Time Time when the background space reclamation task starts.

End Time Time when the background space reclamation task ends.

Step 4 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.3.5 Executing Space Reclamation

In addition to the fixed time configured in a space reclamation policy, you can also
manually start a background space reclamation task.

Precautions
Service performance may deteriorate during space reclamation.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Storage Pools.

Step 2 Click More on the right of the desired storage pool and select Reclaim Space.
NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired storage pool. In the upper right corner of the
page that is displayed, select Reclaim Space from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 3 Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.3.6 Stopping Space Reclamation

This section describes how to stop a background space reclamation task that is
being executed.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Storage Pools.
Step 2 Click More on the right of the desired storage pool and select Stop Reclaiming
Space.
NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired storage pool. In the upper right corner of the
page that is displayed, select Stop Reclaiming Space from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 3 Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.3.7 Exporting Disk Configuration

This section describes how to export disk configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Storage Pools.
Step 2 Click More on the right of the desired storage pool and choose Export Disk
Configuration.
The Export Disk Configuration dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired storage pool. In the upper right corner of the
page that is displayed, select Export Disk Configuration from the Operation drop-down
list.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

5.3.8 Modifying the Properties of a Storage Pool

This section describes how to modify the properties of a storage pool.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Storage Pools.
Step 2 Click More on the right of the desired storage pool and choose Modify.
The Modify Storage Pool page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired storage pool. In the upper right corner of the
page that is displayed, select Modify from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 3 Set the properties for the storage pool.

Table 5-20 describes the parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-20 Storage pool parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the storage pool.

[Value range]
● The name must be unique.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Description Description of the storage pool.

Hot Spare Policy Hot spare policy of the storage pool.

[Value range]
None, Low (1 disk), High (2 disks), Custom (3 disks),
Custom (4 disks), Custom (5 disks), Custom (6 disks),
Custom (7 disks), and Custom (8 disks)
NOTE
● Hot spare capacity is provided by all member disks in each
storage pool because the storage system uses RAID 2.0+
virtualization technology. For ease of understanding, the hot
spare capacity is expressed in the number of hot spare disks on
DeviceManager.
● Even if the hot spare space is used up, the system can use the
free space of the storage pool to reconstruct data, ensuring
storage system reliability.

Capacity Alarm When the percentage of the storage pool's allocated

Threshold (%) capacity to its total capacity reaches this threshold, the
system generates a capacity alarm.
A proper capacity alarm threshold helps you monitor the
capacity usage of a storage pool.
[Value range]
1 to 95

Capacity Used Up When the percentage of the storage pool's allocated

Alarm Threshold capacity to its total capacity reaches this threshold, the
(%) system generates an alarm indicating that the capacity is
being used up. The severity of this alarm is higher than that
of the capacity alarm.
[Value range]
2 to 99
NOTE
The value of Capacity Used Up Alarm Threshold (%) must be
greater than that of Capacity Alarm Threshold (%).

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Protection Data Indicates whether to automatically delete earliest scheduled

Auto Deletion HyperCDP objects when the percentage of the protection
capacity to the storage pool's total capacity reaches
Protection Capacity Upper Limit (%). The automatic
deletion stops when the percentage becomes less than
Protection Capacity Lower Limit (%).

Protection Lower limit for the percentage of the protection capacity to

Capacity Lower the storage pool's total capacity for the system to stop
Limit (%) deleting earliest scheduled HyperCDP objects.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when Protection Data Auto
Deletion is enabled.
[Value range]
1 to 95

Protection Maximum allowable percentage of the protection capacity

Capacity Upper to the storage pool's total capacity. After this threshold is
Limit (%) reached, the system automatically deletes earliest
scheduled HyperCDP objects.
NOTE
● This parameter is available only when Protection Data Auto
Deletion is enabled.
● The value of Protection Capacity Upper Limit (%) must be
greater than that of Protection Capacity Lower Limit (%).
[Value range]
2 to 99

Step 4 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.
----End

5.3.9 Deleting a Storage Pool

This section describes how to delete a storage pool when it is no longer used.

Prerequisites
● LUNs and file systems in the storage pool have been deleted.
● If the storage pool stores historical monitoring data, Retain historical
monitoring data has been deselected and historical monitoring data has
been deleted from the storage pool.

NOTICE

Deleted historical monitoring data cannot be restored. Before deleting

historical monitoring data, confirm that you do not need to view or export it.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

● On DeviceManager, choose Settings > Monitoring Settings. In the Retention

Settings area, deselect Retain historical monitoring data.
● You can delete historical monitoring data in either of the following ways:
● On DeviceManager, deselect Retain historical monitoring data and click
Save. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Delete historical monitoring
data.
● Run the change performance retention_strategy
is_delete_performance_data=yes command on the CLI.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Storage Pools.
Step 2 Click More on the right of the desired storage pool and choose Delete.
NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired storage pool. In the upper right corner of the
page that is displayed, select Delete from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 3 (Optional) Select Erase Data.

NOTICE

● Only data on SSDs and encrypted HDDs can be erased.

● When data is being erased from a disk, a power cycle is automatically
performed for this disk.
● Data erasure takes a long time. The time required with data erasure
mechanisms block_erase and cryptographic_erase used is about 10 minutes,
and that with data erasure mechanism overwrite used varies according to the
configured parameters and disk capacity, which ranges from several hours to
more than 10 hours. For details about how to view the data erasure progress,
see section Viewing the Data Erasure Progress of a Disk in the Administrator
Guide of the desired version.
● Configurations cannot be cleared during data erasure. The commands for
clearing configurations include ccdb.sh -c clearccdb, ccdb.sh -c cleardbfile,
ccdb.sh -c repairdb, ccdb.sh -c clearall, ccdb.sh -c deletedb, restore system
factory_mode, change ccdb general, change cluster controllers, change
controllers_expansion cancel, and clear configuration_data.

1. Select I have read and understand the consequences associated with

performing this operation, and click OK.
The Erase Data page is displayed on the right.
2. Set data erasure parameters.
Table 5-21 describes the parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-21 Data erasure parameters

Parameter Description

Data Erasure Disk data erasure method. Possible options are as

Mechanism follows:
– cryptographic_erase: erases security keys. This
parameter is available only for SEDs.
– block_erase: erases disk data, user data, and
mappings by block.
– overwrite: overwrites disk data with specific pattern
values.

Data Erasure Standard for overwriting disk data. Possible options are
Standard DoD 5220.22-M (E), DoD 5220.22-M (ECE), VSITR, and
Custom. This parameter is available only when Data
Erasure Mechanism is set to overwrite.
NOTE
When Data Erasure Standard is set to Custom, the system will
overwrite disk data according to Pattern Value and
Overwrites specified by users.

Pattern Value Pattern value used to overwrite disk data. A pattern

value can be r or a one-byte hexadecimal number
starting with 0x. A maximum of three values can be
entered.
NOTE
– This parameter is available only when Data Erasure
Standard is set to Custom.
– Value r indicates a random number.

Overwrites Number of times the disk data is overwritten using the

pattern value.

Verify Data Indicates whether to enable the data erasure verification

Erasure function. If Verify Data Erasure is set to Enable, the
system verifies whether the disk data is erased
completely.
NOTE
This parameter is unavailable when Data Erasure Mechanism
is set to cryptographic_erase.

Data to Be Percentage of the data to be verified to the total disk

Verified (%) capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when Verify Data Erasure is
set to Enable.

Step 4 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

5.4 Managing LUNs

This section describes how to manage LUNs.

5.4.1 Viewing LUN Information

This section describes how to view basic information about all LUNs.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUNs.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 View the LUN information in the function pane. Table 5-22 describes the
parameters.

Table 5-22 LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a LUN.

NOTE
You can click the name of a LUN to view its details and manage it.

ID ID of a LUN.

Owning vStore Name of the vStore to which the LUN belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores
in Step 2.

vStore ID ID of the vStore to which the LUN belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores
in Step 2.

Capacity LUN capacity information, including the total capacity of a

LUN and the ratio of the used capacity (that is, the
allocated capacity) to the total capacity of the LUN.
NOTE
Move the cursor to Capacity of a LUN to view the total capacity,
allocated capacity, and data protection capacity of the LUN.

Total Capacity configured for a LUN.

Allocated Amount of user data written to a LUN.

Data Protection Capacity used for data protection on a LUN.

Capacity

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Used Ratio of the used capacity (that is, the allocated capacity)
to the total capacity of a LUN.

Health Status Health status of the LUN.

Running Status Running status of the LUN.

Created Time when the LUN was created.

Data Protection Data protection information about the LUN.

Owning Storage Storage pool to which the LUN belongs.

Pool

Local WWN WWN of the LUN.

NGUID Unique identifier of the namespace of a LUN.

Function Type Function type of a LUN. Possible values are LUN,

Snapshot, and Clone.

Mapping Indicates whether the LUN has been mapped.

Use Type Usage type of the LUN. The possible values are as follows:
● Internal: common LUN created in a local storage
system.
● External: external device LUN (eDevLUN) created for
taking over a LUN from an external storage system.

Application Type Application type of a LUN.

Takeover Type Takeover type of the LUN.

Remote WWN WWN of a remote LUN.

Takeover LUN WWN of the external LUN after takeover, that is, the
WWN eDevLUN WWN.

Step 4 (Optional) Click the name of a LUN to query its summary, topology, mapping, and
protection features.
NOTE

● If a LUN has been added to multiple LUN groups, click the Summary tab on the details
page, and click More on the right of Owning LUN Groups. On the Owning LUN
Groups page that is displayed, view the names and IDs of the owning LUN groups.
● On the Topology tab page, if the number of ports in a port group is greater than 3, you
can click to view details about all ports. When Port Type is Physical port, the
parameters are described in Table 5-23. When Port Type is Logical port, the
parameters are described in Table 5-24.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-23 Physical port parameters

Parameter Description

Type Type of a physical port.

Location Location of a physical port.

Health Status Health status of a physical port.

Usage Usage of a physical port.

Table 5-24 Logical port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a logical port.

Running Status Running status of a logical port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: The running status of the home port of a
logical port is link up.
● Link down: The running status of the home port of a
logical port is link down.
● Standby: In a HyperMetro scenario, when a logical port
works at the owning site of the primary or secondary
end, the running status of the logical port at the non-
owning site of the peer end is Standby.
● To be recovered: When the home port of a logical port
is in the To be recovered state or a logical port used
for the file service fails to be failed over, the running
status of the logical port changes to To be recovered.

Activation Status Indicates whether a logical port is activated.

Data Protocol Data protocol of a logical port.

----End

5.4.2 Mapping a LUN

This section describes how to create one-to-one or many-to-one mapping
relationships between LUNs and hosts.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUNs.
Step 2 Select the vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 3 Select the desired LUNs and click Map.

The Map LUN page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Map LUN page:
● Click More on the right of the desired LUN and select Map.
● Click the name of the desired LUN. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Map from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Click on the right of Selected LUNs. In the Available LUNs list, select the
desired LUNs and add them to Selected LUNs.
NOTE

Skip this step if you want to map each LUN separately.

Step 5 Select a host from the Host drop-down list.

NOTE

You can click Create to create a host on the Create Host page that is displayed.

Step 6 Select a port group from the Port Group drop-down list.
NOTE

You can click Create to create a port group on the Create Port Group page that is
displayed.

Step 7 Select Advanced in the upper right corner and set how to assign host LUN IDs.
● Automatic: The system assigns a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.
● Start ID: Set a start ID ranging from 0 to 4095. The system assigns a host
LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host, starting from Start ID.
● Specified ID: Manually assign a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.

Step 8 If HyperMetro pairs have been created for the LUNs, determine whether to select
Same Host LUN ID. If you select it, the system forcibly ensures that the host LUN
IDs of the local and remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro pairs are the same. In
SAN-based HyperMetro scenarios involving ESX hosts, if the host LUN IDs of the
local and remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro pairs are different, data may be
inconsistent.

Step 9 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.4.3 Unmapping a LUN

This section describes how to unmap a LUN from a host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUNs.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the LUN and choose Unmap.
The Unmap LUN page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Unmap LUN page:
● Click the name of the desired LUN. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Unmap from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired LUN. On the page that is displayed, click the Mapping tab
page, then click More on the right of the host, and select Unmap.

Step 4 Select one or more objects from Available Objects.

NOTE

Skip this step if you unmap a LUN from the Mapping tab page.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.4.4 Expanding a LUN

When storage space is insufficient, you need to expand LUNs in time to meet
capacity requirements.

Capacity Expansion Method

For details, see the administrator guide specific to your product model and version.

5.4.5 Configuring Protection Features

You can configure data protection features for LUNs based on service
requirements.

Configuration Guide
For details, see the specific data protection feature guide. For example, to create
snapshots for LUNs, refer to the HyperSnap feature guide for block specific to your
product model and version.

5.4.6 Adding a Port Group

This section describes how to add a port group for a host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUNs.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click the name of the desired LUN. On the page that is displayed, click the
Mapping tab.

Step 4 Select the desired host and click Add Port Group.

The Add Port Group page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, choose Services > Block Service > VVol > PE LUNs and click the name of the
desired PE LUN. On the page that is displayed, click the Mapping tab, select the desired
host or host group, and click Add Port Group.

Step 5 Select a port group.

NOTE

You can click Create to create a port group.

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.4.7 Removing a Port Group

This section describes how to remove a port group from a host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUNs.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click the name of the desired LUN. On the page that is displayed, click the
Mapping tab.

Step 4 Select the desired host and click Remove Port Group.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.4.8 Modifying the Properties of a LUN

This section describes how to view or modify the properties of a LUN.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUNs.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the LUN and choose Modify.

The Modify LUN page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired LUN. In the upper right corner of the page that
is displayed, select Modify from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Modify the properties of the LUN.

Table 5-25 describes the parameters.

Table 5-25 LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the LUN.

[Value range]
● The name must be unique.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Description Description of the LUN.

[Value range]
The description can be left blank or contain up to 255
characters.

Capacity Indicates whether to enable the capacity alarm threshold

Alarm function. After the function is enabled, you need to set Capacity
Threshold Alarm Threshold (%). When Used of the LUN reaches the
value, the system generates a capacity alarm.

SmartCache Indicates whether to add the LUN to a SmartCache partition.

Partition Adding a LUN to a SmartCache partition shortens the response
time for reading the LUN.

Data Indicates whether to enable data reduction. After this function is

Reduction enabled, the system performs deduplication and compression on
LUNs to save storage space.
NOTE
The data reduction switch can be modified only after SmartDedupe &
SmartCompression Software License Basic is imported to the system.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

5.4.9 Deleting a LUN

This section describes how to delete a LUN to release storage space.

Context
● If the recycle bin is enabled when you delete a LUN, the LUN is moved to the
recycle bin. Data on the LUN will be deleted when the retention period
elapses. You can restore the LUN in the recycle bin.
● If the recycle bin is disabled when you delete a LUN, the data on the LUN is
deleted immediately.

Prerequisites
● The LUN to be deleted is not mapped.
● The child objects of the LUN to be deleted have been deleted or moved to the
recycle bin.

Precautions
Before deleting a LUN, verify that the data on it is of no use or has been backed
up.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUNs.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Select the desired LUN and click Delete.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to delete LUNs:

● Click More on the right of the desired LUN and select Delete.
● Click the name of the desired LUN. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Delete from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.4.10 Managing the Recycle Bin

This section describes how to manage LUNs in the recycle bin.

5.4.10.1 Viewing LUN Information

This section describes how to view information about LUNs in the recycle bin.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > Recycle Bin.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 View the LUN information in the function pane. Table 5-26 describes the
parameters.

Table 5-26 LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a LUN.

NOTE
You can click the name of a LUN to view its details and manage it.

ID ID of a LUN.

Owning vStore Name of the vStore to which the LUN belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores
in Step 2.

vStore ID ID of the vStore to which the LUN belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores
in Step 2.

Total Capacity configured for a LUN.

Allocated Amount of user data written to a LUN.

WWN WWN of a LUN.

Deleted Time when a LUN was moved to the recycle bin.

Parent Object Name of the parent object of a LUN.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only for snapshot LUNs.

Parent Object ID ID of the parent object of a LUN.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only for snapshot LUNs.

Child Objects Number of child objects in a LUN, that is, the number of
snapshots and cascading snapshots created using the LUN
as the source object.

Deletion Status Deletion status of a LUN. Possible values are:

● To be deleted: The LUN is within its retention period.
● Deletion failed: The LUN has reached its retention
period but the system fails to delete it.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 4 (Optional) Click the name of a LUN to view its summary and child objects.
NOTE

On the Child Objects tab page, you can delete child objects of a LUN.

----End

5.4.10.2 Restoring a LUN

This section describes how to restore a LUN in the recycle bin.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > Recycle Bin.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Select one or more desired LUNs and click Restore.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to restore a LUN:

● Click More on the right of the desired LUN and select Restore.
● Click the name of the desired LUN. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Restore from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 After the LUN is moved to the recycle bin, the name of the newly created LUN can
be the same as that of the LUN in the recycle bin. To prevent duplicate names
after restoration, you need to set the name of the restored LUN.
NOTE

● The name cannot be the same as that of an existing LUN.

● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.), underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Step 5 Confirm your operation as prompted.

NOTE

After LUNs are restored, you can choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUNs to
manage them.

----End

5.4.10.3 Configuring the Recycle Bin

This section describes how to enable or disable the recycle bin and configure the
retention period for LUNs in the recycle bin.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > Recycle Bin.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 2 Click Configure Recycle Bin.

The Configure Recycle Bin page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

● The configuration of the recycle bin takes effect for all vStores.
● Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Enable or disable the recycle bin as required:

● Enable
Set Retention Period. The retention period specifies the period of time that a
LUN will be retained after being moved to the recycle bin. Data on the LUN
will be deleted after the retention period elapses.
NOTE

The retention period can be 1 to 168 hours or 1 to 7 days.

● Disable
NOTE

After the recycle bin is disabled, the LUNs in the recycle bin will not be deleted. You
can manually delete them.

Step 4 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.4.10.4 Deleting a LUN

This section describes how to forcibly delete a LUN from the recycle bin.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > Recycle Bin.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Select one or more desired LUNs and click Delete.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to delete a LUN:

● Click More on the right of the desired LUN and select Delete.
● Click the name of the desired LUN. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Delete from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

5.5 Managing LUN Groups

This section describes how to manage LUN groups.

5.5.1 Viewing LUN Group Information

This section describes how to view basic information about all LUN groups.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 View the LUN group information in the function pane. Table 5-27 describes the
parameters.

Table 5-27 LUN group parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the LUN group.

NOTE
You can click the name of a LUN group to
view its details and manage it.

ID ID of the LUN group.

Owning vStore Name of the vStore to which the LUN

group belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when
vStore is set to All vStores in Step 2.

vStore ID ID of the vStore to which the LUN

group belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when
vStore is set to All vStores in Step 2.

Capacity LUN group capacity information,

including total capacity of the LUN
group and the ratio of used capacity
(that is, the allocated capacity) to the
total capacity of the LUN group.
NOTE
Move the cursor to Capacity of a LUN
group to view the total capacity, allocated
capacity, and data protection capacity of
the LUN group.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Allocated Amount of user data written to LUNs

in the LUN group.

Data Protection Data protection information about the

LUN group.

LUNs Number of LUNs in the LUN group.

NOTE
You can click the number to view members
in the LUN group and manage them.

Mapping Indicates whether the LUN group has

been mapped.

Step 4 (Optional) Click the name of a LUN group to query its summary, member LUNs,
topology, mapping, and protection features.
NOTE

● On the Topology tab page, if the number of ports in a port group is greater than 3, you
can click to view details about all ports. When Port Type is Physical port, the
parameters are described in Table 5-28. When Port Type is Logical port, the
parameters are described in Table 5-29.
● On the Topology tab page, if the number of hosts in a host group is greater than 3, you
can click to view details about all hosts. Table 5-30 describes the parameters.

Table 5-28 Physical port parameters

Parameter Description

Type Type of a physical port.

Location Location of a physical port.

Health Status Health status of a physical port.

Usage Usage of a physical port.

Table 5-29 Logical port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a logical port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Running Status Running status of a logical port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: The running status of the home port of a
logical port is link up.
● Link down: The running status of the home port of a
logical port is link down.
● Standby: In a HyperMetro scenario, when a logical port
works at the owning site of the primary or secondary
end, the running status of the logical port at the non-
owning site of the peer end is Standby.
● To be recovered: When the home port of a logical port
is in the To be recovered state or a logical port used
for the file service fails to be failed over, the running
status of the logical port changes to To be recovered.

Activation Status Indicates whether a logical port is activated.

Data Protocol Data protocol of a logical port.

Table 5-30 Host parameters

Parameter Description

Name Member host name.

Health Status Member host health status.

----End

5.5.2 Adding a Port Group

This section describes how to add a port group for a host or host group that uses
the LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click the name of the desired LUN group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Mapping tab.
Step 4 Select the desired host or host group and click Add Port Group.
The Add Port Group page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 5 Select a port group.

NOTE

You can click Create to create a port group.

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.5.3 Removing a Port Group

This section describes how to remove a port group from a host or host group that
uses the LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click the name of the desired LUN group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Mapping tab.

Step 4 Select the desired host or host group and click Remove Port Group.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.5.4 Mapping a LUN Group

This section describes how to create a mapping between a LUN group and a host
or host group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Select the desired LUN group and click Map.

The Map LUN Group page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Map LUN Group
page:
● Click More on the right of the desired LUN group and choose Map.
● Click the name of the desired LUN group. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Map from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Select a host or host group.

NOTE

If no host or host group exists in the system, click Create to create one.

Step 5 (Optional) Select a port group.

NOTE

If no port group exists in the system, click Create.

Step 6 Set how to assign host LUN IDs.

● Automatic: The system assigns a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.
● Start ID: Set a start ID ranging from 0 to 4095. The system assigns a host
LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host, starting from Start ID.
● Specified ID: Manually assign a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.

Step 7 Select Advanced in the upper right corner and determine whether to select Same
Host LUN ID. If you select it, the system forcibly ensures that the host LUN IDs of
the local and remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro pairs are the same. In SAN-
based HyperMetro scenarios involving ESX hosts, if the host LUN IDs of the local
and remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro pairs are different, data may be
inconsistent.

Step 8 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.5.5 Unmapping a LUN Group

This section describes how to unmap a LUN group from a host or host group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the LUN group and choose Unmap.

The Unmap LUN Group page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Unmap LUN Group
page:
● Click the name of the desired LUN group. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Unmap from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired LUN group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Mapping tab page, then click More on the right of the host or host group, and select
Unmap.

Step 4 Select one or more objects from Available Objects.

NOTE

Skip this step if you unmap a LUN group from the Mapping tab page.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.5.6 Adding a LUN

This section describes how to add a LUN to a LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the desired LUN group and choose Add LUN.

The Add LUN page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform any of the following operations to go to the Add LUN page:
● Click the name of the desired LUN group. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Add LUN from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired LUN group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Member LUNs tab page, and then click Add.
● Click the value in the LUNs column of the desired LUN group if the value is not 0. On
the Member LUNs tab page, click Add.

Step 4 Select one or more LUNs from Available LUNs to add them to Selected LUNs.

Step 5 If the LUN group has been mapped, select Advanced in the upper right corner and
set how to assign host LUN IDs.
● Automatic: The system assigns a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.
● Start ID: Set a start ID ranging from 0 to 4095. The system assigns a host
LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host, starting from Start ID.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

● Specified ID: Manually assign a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.
Step 6 If the LUN group has been mapped, determine whether to select Same Host LUN
ID. If you select it, the system forcibly ensures that the host LUN IDs of the local
and remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro pairs are the same. In SAN-based
HyperMetro scenarios involving ESX hosts, if the host LUN IDs of the local and
remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro pairs are different, data may be
inconsistent.
Step 7 If remote replication, HyperMetro, or DR Star is configured for the LUN group, add
LUNs by referring to the feature guide of the corresponding version and model.
Step 8 Click OK.
Confirm your operation as prompted.

NOTE

After the task is created successfully, the Execution Result page is displayed. You can view
details about the current task on this page.

----End

5.5.7 Removing a LUN

This section describes how to remove a LUN from a LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the desired LUN group and choose Remove LUN.
The Remove LUN page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform any of the following operations to remove LUNs:

● Click the name of the desired LUN group. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Remove LUN from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired LUN group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Member LUNs tab page, select the desired LUNs, and click Remove.
● Click the value in the LUNs column of the desired LUN group if the value is not 0. On
the Member LUNs tab page, select the desired LUNs, and click Remove.

Step 4 Select one or more LUNs from Available LUNs to add them to Selected LUNs.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

● Skip this step if you remove LUNs from the Member LUNs tab page.
● If a HyperMetro or remote replication consistency group (CG) has been created for the
LUN group, the related HyperMetro or remote replication pair will be removed from the
CG after you remove a LUN.
● If a DR Star trio has been created for the LUN group, when you remove a LUN from the
LUN group, the HyperMetro pair and two remote replication pairs corresponding to the
LUN are removed from the HyperMetro CG and two remote replication CGs that form
the DR Star trio.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

NOTE

If a HyperMetro or remote replication CG or DR Star trio has been created for the LUN
group, after the task is created successfully, the Execution Result page is displayed. You can
view details about the current task on this page.

----End

5.5.8 Configuring Protection Features

You can configure data protection features for a LUN group based on service
requirements.

Configuration Guide
For details, see the specific data protection feature guide. For example, to create
snapshots for a LUN group, refer to the HyperSnap feature guide for block specific
to your product model and version.

5.5.9 Modifying the Properties of a LUN Group

This section describes how to modify the properties of a LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the desired LUN group and choose Modify.

The Modify LUN Group page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired LUN group. In the upper right corner of the
page that is displayed, select Modify from the Operation drop-down list.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 4 Modify the properties of the LUN group.

1. Modify the Name of the LUN group.
NOTE

– The name must be unique.

– The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.), underscores (_), and hyphens
(-).
– The name contains 1 to 255 characters.
2. Input necessary information about the LUN group in Description to help you
identify the LUN group.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End

5.5.10 Deleting a LUN Group

This section describes how to delete a LUN group to release storage space.

Prerequisites
The LUN group to be deleted has not been mapped.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the desired LUN group and choose Delete.
NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired LUN group. In the upper right corner of the
page that is displayed, select Delete from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.6 Managing VVol

This section describes how to manage VVol.

5.6.1 Creating a PE LUN

This section describes how to create a PE LUN.

Context
PE LUNs are only used by virtual volumes (VVols) in VMware software-defined
storage. VVols provide storage space for VMs. A PE LUN is used as an I/O

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

distributor to simplify the connection between a VM and a VVol. I/Os from a VM

are sent to the VVol through a PE LUN.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > VVol > PE LUNs.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click Create.

The Create PE LUN page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

The screenshot is for reference only and the actual GUI may vary.

Step 4 Set the PE LUN parameters.

Table 5-31 describes the parameters.

Table 5-31 PE LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the PE LUN.

[Value range]
● The name must be unique.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Owning vStore to which the newly created PE LUN belongs.

vStore NOTE
This parameter is mandatory when vStore is set to All vStores in Step 2.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Description Description of the PE LUN.

[Value range]
The description can be left blank or contain up to 255 characters.

Owning Storage pool to which the PE LUN belongs.

Storage
Pool

Quantity Number of PE LUNs created in a batch. Set this parameter based

on site requirements.
[Value range]
1 to 64

Start Start number from which the system incrementally adds a suffix
Number number to the name of each PE LUN for distinction.
[Value range]
0 to (10000 – Number of PE LUNs created in a batch)
NOTE
● This parameter is displayed only when Quantity is greater than 1 and
Advanced is selected.
● For example, if you want to create 300 PE LUNs, the value range of
Start Number is 0 to 9700.

Map to Host to which the PE LUN you are creating is mapped.

Host NOTE
● If no host is available in the system, click Create.
● You can also map the PE LUNs after you have created them.
● This parameter is displayed only when Add to LUN Group is not
selected.

Add to LUN Determines whether to add the PE LUN to a LUN group.

Group

LUN Group After selecting Add to LUN Group, you must choose a LUN
group.
NOTE
You can click Create to create a LUN group.

Map To Specifies the host or host group to which the LUN group is
mapped.
NOTE
You can click Create to create a host or host group.

Port Group Port group you want to use for the mapping.
NOTE
● This option is displayed after you have selected a host or host group.
● If no port group exists in the system, click Create.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Host LUN Method to assign IDs.

ID ● Automatic
A host LUN ID is allocated by the storage system to a LUN
mapped to a host. If you select Automatic, the system
automatically allocates a unique host LUN ID to each LUN.
● Start ID
The system automatically allocates a unique host LUN ID to
each LUN, starting from Start ID.

Start ID Start number for host LUN IDs.

[Value range]
0 to 4095
NOTE
This parameter is displayed only when Host LUN ID is Start ID.

NOTE

The Description, Start Number, and Host LUN ID are hidden parameters. You can click
Advanced to display them.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.6.2 Viewing PE LUNs

This section describes how to view the basic information about PE LUNs.

Context
● On the PE LUN management page, click to refresh PE LUN information.

● On the PE LUN management page, click or next to a parameter, and

enter a keyword or select a value to search for the desired PE LUNs.

● On the PE LUN management page, click and select the PE LUN parameters
you want to view.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > VVol > PE LUNs.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 3 View the PE LUN information in the function pane. Table 5-32 describes the
parameters.

Table 5-32 PE LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the PE LUN.

ID ID of the PE LUN.

Owning vStore Name of the vStore to which the PE LUN belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores in
Step 2.

vStore ID ID of the vStore to which the PE LUN belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores in
Step 2.

Capacity Capacity of the PE LUN.

Health Status Health status of the PE LUN.

Running Status Running status of the PE LUN.

Owning Storage pool to which the PE LUN belongs.

Storage Pool

Local WWN Local WWN of the PE LUN.

NGUID Unique identifier of the namespace of a PE LUN.

Mapping Indicates whether the PE LUN has been mapped to a host.

Use Type Usage type of the LUN. The value is PE LUNs.

Step 4 (Optional) Click the name of a PE LUN to view its Summary, Topology, and
Mapping.
NOTE

● If a PE LUN has been added to multiple LUN groups, click the Summary tab on the
details page, and click More on the right of Owning LUN Groups. On the Owning LUN
Groups page that is displayed, view the names and IDs of the owning LUN groups.
● On the Topology tab page, if the number of ports in a port group is greater than 3, you
can click to view details about all ports. When Port Type is Physical port, the
parameters are described in Table 5-33. When Port Type is Logical port, the
parameters are described in Table 5-34.

Table 5-33 Physical port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Type of a physical port.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Location Location of a physical port.

Health Status Health status of a physical port.

Usage Usage of a physical port.

Table 5-34 Logical port parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a logical port.

Running Status Running status of a logical port.

● Unknown: The system fails to query the port status.
● Link up: The running status of the home port of a
logical port is link up.
● Link down: The running status of the home port of a
logical port is link down.
● Standby: In a HyperMetro scenario, when a logical port
works at the owning site of the primary or secondary
end, the running status of the logical port at the non-
owning site of the peer end is Standby.
● To be recovered: When the home port of a logical port
is in the To be recovered state or a logical port used
for the file service fails to be failed over, the running
status of the logical port changes to To be recovered.

Activation Status Indicates whether a logical port is activated.

Data Protocol Data protocol of a logical port.

----End

5.6.3 Modifying a PE LUN

This section describes how to modify the name and description of a PE LUN.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > VVol > PE LUNs.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the desired PE LUN and choose Modify.
The Modify PE LUN page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired PE LUN. In the upper right corner of the page
that is displayed, select Modify from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Modify the name of the PE LUN.

NOTE

● The name must be unique.

● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.), underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Step 5 Modify the description of the PE LUN.

NOTE

The description can be left blank or contain up to 255 characters.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.6.4 Adding a Port Group

This section describes how to add a port group for a host or host group that uses
the PE LUN.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > VVol > PE LUNs.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click the name of the desired PE LUN. On the page that is displayed, click the
Mapping tab.
Step 4 Select the desired host or host group and click Add Port Group.
The Add Port Group page is displayed on the right.
Step 5 Select a port group.
NOTE

You can click Create to create a port group.

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.6.5 Removing a Port Group

This section describes how to remove a port group from a host or host group that
uses the PE LUN.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > VVol > PE LUNs.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click the name of the desired PE LUN. On the page that is displayed, click the
Mapping tab.

Step 4 Select the desired host or host group and click Remove Port Group.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.6.6 Modifying Host LUN IDs

This section describes how to modify the LUN ID for a host or host group that
uses the PE LUN.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > VVol > PE LUNs.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click the name of the desired PE LUN. On the page that is displayed, click the
Mapping tab.

Step 4 Click More on the right of the desired host or host group and choose Modify Host
LUN ID.

The Modify Host LUN ID page is displayed on the right.

Step 5 Set Host LUN ID. The value ranges from 0 to 4095.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.6.7 Mapping a PE LUN

This section describes how to create one-to-one or many-to-one mapping
relationships between PE LUNs and hosts.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > VVol > PE LUNs.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Select the desired PE LUN and click Map.

The Map PE LUN page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform any of the following operations to go to the Map PE LUN page:
● Click More on the right of the desired PE LUN and select Map.
● Click the name of the desired PE LUN. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Map from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Select the PE LUNs you want to map. Click on the right of Selected LUNs. In
the Available LUNs list, select the desired LUNs and add them to Selected LUNs.
NOTE

Skip this step if you want to map each PE LUN separately.

Step 5 Select a host.

NOTE

You can click Create to create a host.

Step 6 Select a port group.

NOTE

You can click Create to create a port group.

Step 7 Select Advanced in the upper right corner and set how to assign host LUN IDs.
● Automatic
A host LUN ID is allocated by the storage system to a LUN mapped to a host.
If you select Automatic, the system automatically allocates a unique host
LUN ID to each LUN.
● Start ID
The system automatically allocates a unique host LUN ID to each LUN,
starting from Start ID.

Step 8 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.6.8 Unmapping a PE LUN

This section describes how to unmap a PE LUN from a host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > VVol > PE LUNs.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the desired PE LUN and choose Unmap.

The Unmap PE LUN page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Unmap PE LUN page:
● Click the name of the desired PE LUN. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Unmap from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired PE LUN. On the page that is displayed, click the Mapping
tab page, then click More on the right of the host, and select Unmap.

Step 4 Select one or more objects from Available Objects.

NOTE

This step is not needed if you unmap a PE LUN from the Mapping tab page.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.6.9 Deleting a PE LUN

This section describes how to delete a PE LUN to release storage space.

Prerequisites
The PE LUN you want to delete has not been mapped.

Precautions
Before deleting a PE LUN, confirm that its data is of no use or has been backed
up.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > VVol > PE LUNs.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Select the desired PE LUN and click Delete.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to delete a PE LUN:

● Click More on the right of the desired PE LUN and select Delete.
● Click the name of the desired PE LUN. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Delete from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.6.10 Viewing VVol LUNs

This section describes how to view the basic information about VVol LUNs.

Context
● On the VVol LUN management page, click to refresh VVol LUN
information.

● On the VVol LUN management page, click or next to a parameter, and

enter a keyword or select a value to search for the desired VVol LUNs.

● On the VVol LUN management page, click and select the VVol LUN
parameters you want to view.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > VVol > VVol LUNs.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 View the VVol LUN information in the function pane. Table 5-35 describes the
parameters.

Table 5-35 VVol LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the VVol LUN.

ID ID of the VVol LUN.

Owning vStore Name of the vStore to which the VVol LUN belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores in
Step 2.

vStore ID ID of the vStore to which the VVol LUN belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores in
Step 2.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Capacity Capacity of the VVol LUN.

Health Status Health status of the VVol LUN.

Running Status Running status of the VVol LUN.

Data Protection Data protection information about the VVol LUN.

Owning Storage pool to which the VVol LUN belongs.

Storage Pool

Local WWN Local WWN of the VVol LUN.

NGUID Unique identifier of the namespace of a VVol LUN.

Function Type Function type of a VVol LUN. Possible values are LUN and
Snapshot.

Use Type Usage type of the LUN. The value is VVol LUNs, indicating
that the LUN provides storage space for VMware VMs.

Step 4 (Optional) Click the name of a VVol LUN to view its summary and protection
information.
NOTE

The snapshots, remote replication pairs, and HyperCDP objects of VVol LUNs can only be
viewed, but cannot be configured and managed on DeviceManager.

----End

5.7 Managing Hosts

This section describes how to manage hosts.

5.7.1 Viewing Host Information

This section describes how to view the information about all hosts.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, view the host information in the function pane. Table
5-36 describes the parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-36 Host parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the host.

NOTE
You can click the name of a host to view
its details and manage it.

ID ID of the host.

Owning vStore Name of the vStore to which the host

belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when
vStore is set to All vStores in Step 2.

vStore ID ID of the vStore to which the host

belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when
vStore is set to All vStores in Step 2.

Health Status Health status of the host.

[Value range]
Normal, Offline, or No redundant
link
[Example]
Normal

OS Operating system used by the host.

[Example]
Linux

LUN Capacity Usage Capacity usage of the LUNs mapped to

the host.

Owning Host Group Indicates whether the host has been

added to a host group.

IP Address IP address of the host.

Initiators Number of initiators on the host.

NOTE
When the number of initiators is not 0, you
can click the number to view details about
the initiators.

----End

5.7.2 Viewing Path Details

This section describes how to view the path details of a host.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, click the name of the desired host. Click the Path Details
tab.

Step 4 View path details. Table 5-37 describes the related parameters.

Table 5-37 Path details parameters

Parameter Description

Health Status Health status of the path.

[Example]
Normal

Link Status Link status of the path.

[Example]
Online

Initiator Type Type of the initiator.

[Example]
iSCSI

Initiator Identifier Identifier of the initiator

Target Identifier Identifier of the target

Port Local port of the path.

Initiator Alias Alias of the initiator.

Host Host associated with the path.

Host IP Address IP address of a host.

NOTE

You can click to refresh the path information.

----End

5.7.3 Viewing Host LUN IDs

A host LUN ID is allocated by the storage system to a LUN mapped to a host. This
ID is visible on the host.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, click the name of the desired host. On the page that is
displayed, click the Mapping tab page.
Step 4 Click View Host LUN ID.
The View Host LUN ID page is displayed on the right.
Step 5 View the LUNs mapped to the host and their host LUN IDs.

----End

5.7.4 Modifying Host LUN IDs

This section describes how to modify host LUN IDs.

Prerequisites
Host services on the LUN have been stopped, and the virtual disk created by
multipathing software and physical disk corresponding to the LUN have been
uninstalled from the host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, click the name of the desired host. On the page that is
displayed, click the Mapping tab.
Step 4 Click More on the right of the desired LUN or LUN group and choose Modify Host
LUN ID.
The Modify Host LUN ID page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Modify Host LUN ID
page:
● On the Mapping tab page, click View Host LUN ID. On the View Host LUN ID page
that is displayed, click Modify in the upper right corner.
● Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUNs and click the name of the
desired LUN. On the page that is displayed, click the Mapping tab, then click More on
the right of the host, and choose Modify Host LUN ID.
● Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups and click the name of
the desired LUN group. On the page that is displayed, click the Mapping tab, then click
More on the right of the host or host group, and choose Modify Host LUN ID.

Step 5 Set the host LUN ID for each LUN. The value ranges from 0 to 4095.

Step 6 If HyperMetro pairs have been created for the LUNs or a LUN group is selected,
select Advanced in the upper right corner and determine whether to select Same
Host LUN ID. If you select it, the system checks whether the host LUN IDs of the
local and remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro pairs are the same when you
change the host LUN IDs. In SAN-based HyperMetro scenarios involving ESX hosts,
if the host LUN IDs of the local and remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro pairs
are different, data may be inconsistent.

Step 7 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After a host LUN ID is modified, re-scan for disks on the host.

5.7.5 Adding a Port Group

This section describes how to add a port group for a LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, click the name of the desired host. On the page that is
displayed, click the Mapping tab page.

Step 4 Select the desired LUN group and click Add Port Group.

The Add Port Group page is displayed on the right.

Step 5 Select a port group.

NOTE

You can click Create to create a port group.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.7.6 Removing a Port Group

This section describes how to remove a port group for a LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, click the name of the desired host. On the page that is
displayed, click the Mapping tab page.
Step 4 Select the desired LUN group and click Remove Port Group.
Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.7.7 Mapping a LUN Group to a Host

This section describes how to create a mapping between a host and a LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, select the desired host and choose Map > Map LUN
Group.
The Map LUN Group page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Map LUN Group
page:
● Click More on the right of the desired host and choose Map LUN Group.
● Click the name of the desired host. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Map LUN Group from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Select a LUN group.

● If you select New:

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

a. Set the name of the new LUN group.

b. Select the storage pool to which the LUN group belongs. Set Application
Type for LUNs.
NOTE

The following preset application types are provided for typical applications:
Default, Oracle_OLAP, Oracle_OLTP, Oracle_OLAP&OLTP, SQL_Server_OLAP,
SQL_Server_OLTP, SQL_Server_OLAP&OLTP, SAP_HANA, Vmware_VDI, Hyper-
V_VDI, Others, and FusionAccess_VDI

▪ The preset application types specify the application request sizes. When
SmartCompression and SmartDedupe licenses are imported to the system, the
preset application types also display whether SmartCompression and
SmartDedupe are enabled. For details, see SmartDedupe and
SmartCompression Feature Guide for Block of the desired product model and
version.

▪ After you have set an application type for a LUN, you are unable to change it
in follow-up operations.

▪ If the application type configured for a LUN does not match the actual I/O
model, the LUN performance may deteriorate.

▪ If none of the preset application types matches the actual I/O model, you can
run the create lun_workload_type general command to create one. For
details on this command, refer to the Command Reference.

▪ Only 6.1.3 and later versions support Others.

c. Specify the LUN name prefix, capacity per LUN, and quantity. Table 5-38
describes the parameters.

Table 5-38 LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Prefix Name prefix of the LUN. The names of the new LUNs
are numbered in sequence based on the name prefix.

Capacity per Capacity of the LUN in the LUN group.

LUN NOTE

▪ The maximum capacity of the LUN must not exceed the

system specifications.

▪ You can set the capacity unit to Blocks to create LUNs by

block. A block is equal to 512 bytes. The LUN capacity
must not be smaller than 1024 blocks (that is, 512 KB).

▪ The storage system uses the following capacity

algorithms defined by Windows: 1 PB = 1,024 TB, 1 TB =
1,024 GB, 1 GB = 1,024 MB, 1 MB = 1,024 KB, and 1 KB =
1,024 bytes.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Quantity Number of LUNs created in a batch. Set this

parameter based on site requirements.
[Value range]
1 to 500
NOTE

▪ LUNs created in a batch have the same capacity.

▪ When LUNs are created in a batch, the system

automatically adds suffixes to the names based on the
number of LUNs for distinction. You can click to
manually specify the start number for the suffixes.

d. (Optional) When creating LUNs in a batch, click and set the suffixes of
the LUNs. Related parameters include Suffix Digits and Suffix (start
number of the suffixes). The system adds a suffix to the end of each LUN
name in ascending order based on the specified start suffix number.
NOTE

▪ The value range of Suffix is 0 to (10000 – Quantity).

▪ For example, if you want to create 300 LUNs, the value range of Suffix is 0 to
9700.

e. (Optional) Click to add more LUNs.

f. (Optional) Click to remove LUNs.
● If you select Existing:
Select a LUN group from the list.
NOTE

You can select Include mapped LUN groups to query the LUN groups that have been
mapped to the current host. For these LUN groups, mapping cannot be created
repeatedly.

Step 5 (Optional) Select a port group.

NOTE

If no port group exists in the system, click Create.

Step 6 Set how to assign host LUN IDs.

● Automatic: The system assigns a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.
● Start ID: Set a start ID ranging from 0 to 4095. The system assigns a host
LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host, starting from Start ID.
● Specified ID: Manually assign a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.
Step 7 If you select an existing LUN group, select Advanced in the upper right corner and
determine whether to select Same Host LUN ID. If you select it, the system
forcibly ensures that the host LUN IDs of the local and remote LUNs in the same
HyperMetro pairs are the same. In SAN-based HyperMetro scenarios involving ESX

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

hosts, if the host LUN IDs of the local and remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro
pairs are different, data may be inconsistent.
Step 8 Click OK.
Confirm your operation as prompted.

NOTE

After the task is created successfully, the Execution Result page is displayed. You can view
details about the current task on this page.

----End

5.7.8 Mapping LUNs to a Host

This section describes how to create a mapping between a host and LUNs.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, select the desired host and choose Map > Map LUN.
The Map LUN page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Map LUN page:
● Click More on the right of the desired host and choose Map LUN.
● Click the name of the desired host. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Map LUN from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Select LUNs.

● If you select New:
a. Set the LUN parameters.
Table 5-39 describes the parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-39 LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the LUN.

NOTE
[Value range]

▪ The name must be unique.

▪ The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.),

underscores (_), and hyphens (-).

▪ The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Owning Storage pool to which the LUN you are creating

Storage Pool belongs.

Capacity Capacity of the LUN.

NOTE

▪ The maximum capacity of the LUN must not exceed the

system specifications.

▪ You can set the capacity unit to Blocks to create LUNs by

block. A block is equal to 512 bytes. The LUN capacity
must not be smaller than 1024 blocks (that is, 512 KB).

▪ The storage system uses the following capacity

algorithms defined by Windows: 1 PB = 1,024 TB, 1 TB =
1,024 GB, 1 GB = 1,024 MB, 1 MB = 1,024 KB, and 1 KB =
1,024 bytes.

Quantity Number of LUNs created in a batch. Set this

parameter based on site requirements.
[Value range]
1 to 500
NOTE
LUNs created in a batch have the same capacity.

Suffix Digits Number of digits in the suffixes of the LUNs to be

created in a batch.
NOTE
This parameter is displayed only when Quantity is greater
than 1.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Suffix Set the start number of the suffixes of the LUNs to be

created in a batch. The system adds a suffix to the
end of each LUN name in ascending order based on
the specified start suffix number.
NOTE

▪ This parameter is displayed only when Quantity is

greater than 1.

▪ The value range of Suffix is 0 to (10000 – Quantity).

▪ For example, if you want to create 300 LUNs, the value

range of Suffix is 0 to 9700.

Application Application type of the LUN. The following preset

Type application types are provided for typical applications:
Default, Oracle_OLAP, Oracle_OLTP,
Oracle_OLAP&OLTP, SQL_Server_OLAP,
SQL_Server_OLTP, SQL_Server_OLAP&OLTP,
SAP_HANA, Vmware_VDI, Hyper-V_VDI, Others,
and FusionAccess_VDI
NOTE

▪ The preset application types specify the application

request sizes. When SmartCompression and
SmartDedupe licenses are imported to the system, the
preset application types also display whether
SmartCompression and SmartDedupe are enabled. For
details, see SmartDedupe and SmartCompression Feature
Guide for Block of the desired product model and
version.

▪ After you have set an application type for a LUN, you are
unable to change it in follow-up operations.

▪ If the application type configured for a LUN does not

match the actual I/O model, the LUN performance may
deteriorate.

▪ If none of the preset application types matches the

actual I/O model, you can run the create
lun_workload_type general command to create one.
For details on this command, refer to the Command
Reference.

▪ Only 6.1.3 and later versions support Others.

● If you select Existing:

Select one or more LUNs from Available LUNs to add them to Selected
LUNs.
NOTE

You can select Include mapped LUNs to query the LUNs that have been mapped to
the current host. For these LUNs, mapping cannot be created repeatedly.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 5 (Optional) Select a port group.

NOTE

● If no port group exists in the system, click Create.

● After a port group is selected, LUNs use the ports of the port group to communicate
with hosts in the host group. If no port group is selected, available ports are randomly
used.

Step 6 Set how to assign host LUN IDs.

● Automatic: The system assigns a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.
● Start ID: Set a start ID ranging from 0 to 4095. The system assigns a host
LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host, starting from Start ID.
● Specified ID: Manually assign a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.

Step 7 If HyperMetro pairs have been created for the selected LUNs, select Advanced in
the upper right corner and determine whether to select Same Host LUN ID. If you
select it, the system forcibly ensures that the host LUN IDs of the local and remote
LUNs in the same HyperMetro pairs are the same. In SAN-based HyperMetro
scenarios involving ESX hosts, if the host LUN IDs of the local and remote LUNs in
the same HyperMetro pairs are different, data may be inconsistent.

Step 8 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

NOTE

After the task is created successfully, the Execution Result page is displayed. You can view
details about the current task on this page.

----End

5.7.9 Unmapping a Host

This section describes how to cancel the mapping between a host and LUNs or a
LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, click More on the right of the desired host and choose
Unmap.

The Unmap Object page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Unmap Object page:
● Click the name of the desired host. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Unmap from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired host. On the page that is displayed, click the Mapping tab
page, then click More on the right of the LUN or LUN group, and select Unmap.

Step 4 Select one or more objects from Available Objects.

NOTE

Skip this step if you cancel the mapping between a host and LUNs or a LUN group from the
Mapping tab page.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.7.10 Scanning for Hosts

This section describes how to scan for hosts to add detected hosts to the host list.

Prerequisites
The host scanning function has been enabled on the Block Service page (Settings
> Block Service).

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, click Scan for Host.

----End

5.7.11 Adding an Initiator

This section describes how to add an initiator to a host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, click More on the right of the desired host and choose
Add Initiator.

The Add Initiator page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Add Initiator page:
● Click the name of the desired host. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Add Initiator from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired host. On the page that is displayed, click the Initiators tab
page, and then click Add.

Step 4 Select initiators.

1. Select an initiator type (FC, iSCSI, or NVMe over RoCE) based on service
requirements.
2. For an FC initiator, you need to select the vStore to which the initiator
belongs. An FC initiator whose owning vStore is the same as that of the
created host or whose owning vStore is -- can be added to the host.
For iSCSI and NVMe over RoCE initiators, you can only add initiators whose
owning vStore is the same as that of the created host to the host.
3. Select one or more initiators from Available Initiators.

Step 5 (Optional) Click Create Initiator. On the Create Initiator page that is displayed,
set the related parameters.
NOTE

● If initiators have been configured on an application server:

– When initiators can be automatically discovered on DeviceManager, skip this step.
– When initiators cannot be automatically discovered on DeviceManager, create
initiators using the IQNs or WWPNs of initiators configured on the application
server.
● If no initiator has been configured on an application server, configure initiators by
following instructions in Configuring Connectivity in the corresponding Host
Connectivity Guide and then add initiators on DeviceManager.
● On DeviceManager, set parameters of initiators manually created or automatically
discovered based on the multipathing software and host operating system version. For
details about recommended parameter settings in different scenarios, see Configuring
Multipathing in the corresponding Host Connectivity Guide. For iSCSI initiators, you
need to set CHAP authentication parameters based on the security authentication plan.

Table 5-40 describes the FC initiator parameters.

Table 5-40 FC initiator parameters

Parameter Description

WWPN World Wide Port Name (WWPN) of the initiator.

[Value range]
A WWPN is a hexadecimal value that contains 16 characters.
It can contain letters A to F (uppercase and lowercase) and
digits 0 to 9. It cannot be all 0, all F, or all f.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Alias Alias of the initiator.

[Value range]
● An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31 characters.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).

Table 5-41 describes the iSCSI initiator parameters.

Table 5-41 iSCSI initiator parameters

Parameter Description

IQN iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN) of the iSCSI initiator.

NOTE
The IQN of an initiator must be the same as the one on the
application server. The IQN of an initiator must be unique. Do not
configure the initiators of multiple application servers with the same
IQN.
[Value range]
An IQN must contain 1 to 223 visible ASCII characters and
start with a digit or letter.

Alias Alias of the iSCSI initiator.

[Value range]
● An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31 characters.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).

CHAP CHAP authentication includes Normal Authentication and

Discovery Authentication options.
● If you enable CHAP, you must configure a CHAP name
and password for the storage system and the same CHAP
name and password on the application server.
● If you do not enable CHAP, you do not need to configure
a CHAP name or password.
NOTE
After changing the CHAP authentication password on the storage
system, you must use the new password to configure the CHAP
authentication again on the application server.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Normal The normal session is the process during which the target
Authentication and initiator transmit data between each other after
connections have been set up. Authentication modes include:
● No authentication
● Unidirectional authentication
The target authenticates the initiator.
● Bidirectional authentication
The target and initiator authenticate each other.

Discovery The discovery session is the process during which the target
Authentication and initiator are setting up connections. Authentication
modes include:
● No authentication
● Unidirectional authentication
The target authenticates the initiator.
● Bidirectional authentication
The target and initiator authenticate each other.
NOTE
When Normal Authentication or Discovery Authentication is set to
Bidirectional authentication, you need to specify the CHAP Name
and Password, and confirm the password in both the Target
Authenticates Initiator and Initiator Authenticates Target areas.

CHAP Name User name for CHAP authentication.

NOTE
● The name must contain 4 to 223 characters.
● The name can contain only letters, digits, and special characters
(!"#$&%'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~).
● The first character must be a letter or digit.

Password Password for CHAP authentication.

NOTE
● The password can contain 12 to 16 characters.
● The password must contain at least three types of characters
among uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, and special
characters (`~!@#$%^&*()-_=+|[{}];:<,.\>/? and spaces).
● The password must not be the same as the user name or the user
name spelled backwards.

Confirm Password for CHAP authentication.

Password [Value range]
The value of Confirm Password must be consistent with that
of Password.

Table 5-42 describes the NVMe over RoCE initiator parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-42 NVMe over RoCE initiator parameters

Parameter Description

NQN World Wide Port Name (WWPN) of the initiator.

[Value range]
● The value contains 1 to 223 characters.
● The value must start with a digit or letter.
● The value must be visible ASCII characters.

Alias Alias of the initiator.

[Value range]
● An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31 characters.
● The value can contain only letters, digits, underscores (_),
hyphens (-), and periods (.).

NOTE

After you click OK, the new initiator is automatically added to the list on the right.

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.7.12 Modifying an Initiator

This section describes how to modify the parameters of an initiator.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, click the name of the desired host.
The host details page is displayed.
Step 4 Click the Initiators tab page.
Step 5 Click More on the right of the desired initiator and choose Modify.
The Modify Initiator page is displayed on the right.
Step 6 (Optional) Set an alias for the initiator.
Step 7 Click OK.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

5.7.13 Removing an Initiator

This section describes how to remove an initiator from a host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, click More on the right of the desired host and choose
Remove Initiator.
The Remove Initiator page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform any of the following operations to remove initiators:

● Click the name of the desired host. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Remove Initiator from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired host. On the page that is displayed, click the Initiators tab
page, select the desired initiators, and click Remove.
● Click the name of the desired host. On the page that is displayed, click the Initiators tab
page, click More on the right of the desired initiator, and select Remove.

Step 4 Select initiators.

Select one or more initiators from Available Initiators.

NOTE

Skip this step if you remove initiators from the Initiators tab page.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.7.14 Modifying the Properties of a Host

This section describes how to modify the properties of a host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, click More on the right of the desired host and choose
Modify.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

The Modify Host page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired host. In the upper right corner of the page that
is displayed, select Modify from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Modify the general properties of the host.

1. Modify the Name for the host.
NOTE

– The name must be unique.

– The name can contain only letters, digits, underscores (_), hyphens (-), and periods
(.).
– The name contains 1 to 255 characters.
2. Select the vStore to which the host belongs from the Owning vStore drop-
down list.
NOTE

After the vStore to which the host belongs is modified, the vStore to which the
initiator of the host belongs changes accordingly.
3. (Optional) Modify the Description of the host.
4. Modify the OS of the host.
5. (Optional) Modify the IP Address of the host.
6. (Optional) Modify the Location of the host.
7. Select a Host Access Mode. The possible values are Load balancing and
Asymmetric.
NOTE

The host access mode indicates that a host accesses local and remote storage systems
in a HyperMetro pair.
– Load balancing: Hosts access local and remote devices with equal priority.
– Asymmetric: Hosts preferentially access the specified device.
If a LUN has been mapped to a host, restart the host for the modification to take
effect after you modify the host access mode. You do not need to restart the system
when configuring the mapping for the first time.
For details about how to configure the host access mode in different operating
systems, see the corresponding Host Connectivity Guide.
8. When Host Access Mode is Asymmetric, set Preferred Path for
HyperMetro.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.7.15 Deleting a Host

Deleting a host interrupts the communication between the corresponding
application server and the LUNs mapped to the host.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Prerequisites
The host to be deleted is not a member of any host group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Hosts.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Hosts tab page, select the desired host and click Delete.
NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to delete hosts:

● Click More on the right of the host and choose Delete.
● Click the name of the desired host. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Delete from the Operation drop-down list.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.8 Managing Initiators

An initiator is a system component that initiates I/Os on an I/O bus or network.

5.8.1 Creating an Initiator

This section describes how to create an initiator for a storage system.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Initiators.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Initiators tab page, select an initiator type and click Create.

The Create Initiator page is displayed.

Step 4 Set the initiator parameters.

● FC initiator
Table 5-43 describes the parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-43 FC initiator parameters

Parameter Description

WWPN World Wide Port Name (WWPN) of the initiator.

[Value range]
A WWPN consists of 16 hexadecimal numbers (0 to
9 and A to F or a to f). It cannot be all 0s or all Fs
(both uppercase and lowercase).

Owning vStore vStore to which the newly created host belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is mandatory when vStore is set to All
vStores in Step 2.

Alias Alias of the initiator.

[Value range]
– An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31
characters.
– It contains only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).

● iSCSI initiator
Table 5-43 describes the parameters.

Table 5-44 iSCSI initiator parameters

Parameter Description

IQN iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN) of the iSCSI initiator.

NOTE
The IQN of an initiator must be the same as the one on
the application server. The IQN of an initiator must be
unique. Do not use the same IQN for the initiators from
multiple application servers.
[Value range]
An IQN contains 1 to 223 characters.

Owning vStore vStore to which the newly created host belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is mandatory when vStore is set to All
vStores in Step 2.

Alias Alias of the iSCSI initiator.

[Value range]
– An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31
characters.
– It contains only letters, digits, periods (.),
underscores (_), and hyphens (-).

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

CHAP Specifies whether to enable CHAP authentication.

CHAP authentication includes Normal
Authentication and Discovery Authentication
options.
– If you enable CHAP, you must configure the
same CHAP name and password for the storage
system and the application server.
– If you do not enable CHAP, you do not need to
configure a CHAP name or password.

Normal The normal session is the process during which the

Authentication target and initiator transmit data between each
other after connections have been set up.
Authentication modes include:
– No authentication
– Unidirectional authentication
The target authenticates the initiator.
– Bidirectional authentication
The target and initiator authenticate each
other.

Discovery The discovery session is the process during which

Authentication the target and initiator are setting up connections.
Authentication modes include:
– No authentication
– Unidirectional authentication
The target authenticates the initiator.
– Bidirectional authentication
The target and initiator authenticate each
other.

CHAP Name User name for CHAP authentication.

[Value range]
– The name must contain 4 to 223 characters.
– The name can contain only letters, digits, and
the following special characters:
!"#$&%'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
– The first character must be a letter or digit.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Password Password for CHAP authentication.

[Value range]
– The password must contain 12 to 16 characters.
– The password must contain at least three of the
following types of characters:

▪ Uppercase letters

▪ Lowercase letters

▪ Digits

▪ Special characters (including spaces)

!"#$&%'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
– The password must not be the same as the user
name or the user name spelt backwards.

Confirm Password Enter the password again for confirmation.

NOTE

If you choose Bidirectional authentication, you must configure the CHAP name and
password for Target Authenticates Initiator and Initiator Authenticates Target.
● NVMe over RoCE initiator
Table 5-45 describes the parameters.

Table 5-45 NVMe over RoCE initiator parameters

Parameter Description

NQN World Wide Port Name (WWPN) of the initiator.

[Value range]
– The value contains 1 to 223 characters.
– The value must start with a digit or letter.
– The value must be visible ASCII characters.

Owning vStore vStore to which the newly created initiator belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is mandatory when vStore is set to All
vStores in Step 2.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Alias Alias of the initiator.

[Value range]
– An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31
characters.
– The value can contain only letters, digits,
underscores (_), hyphens (-), and periods (.).

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.8.2 Viewing Initiator Information

This section describes how to view initiator information.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Initiators.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Initiators tab page, select an initiator type. In the function pane, view
information about initiators. Table 5-46 describes the parameters.

Table 5-46 Initiator parameters

Parameter Description

WWPN/IQN/NQ ● WWPN: unique identifier of the FC initiator.

N ● IQN: iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN) of the iSCSI initiator.
● NQN: unique identifier of the NVMe over RoCE initiator.

Owning vStore Name of the vStore to which the initiator belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores in
Step 2.

vStore ID ID of the vStore to which the initiator belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores in
Step 2.

Alias Alias of the initiator.

Status Indicates whether an initiator is online.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Associated with Indicates whether the initiator has been associated with a
Host host.

Associated Host Name of the host with which the initiator is associated.
Name

Associated Host IP address of the host with which the initiator is associated.
IP Address NOTE
This parameter is displayed only when the initiator type is iSCSI or
NVMe over RoCE.

----End

5.8.3 Modifying an Initiator

This section describes how to modify the parameters of an initiator.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Initiators.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Initiators tab page, select an initiator type.

Step 4 Click More on the right of the desired initiator and select Modify.

The Modify Initiator page is displayed on the right.

Step 5 Modify the initiator information.

● FC initiator
a. Select the vStore to which the initiator belongs from the Owning vStore
drop-down list.
NOTE

If an initiator has been added to a host, the owning vStore of the initiator can be
modified only on the host.
b. Set an alias for an FC initiator.
NOTE

▪ An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31 characters.

▪ The name can contain only letters, digits, underscores (_), hyphens (-), and
periods (.).
● iSCSI initiator
Table 5-47 describes the parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-47 iSCSI initiator parameters

Parameter Description

Owning vStore vStore to which the initiator belongs.

NOTE
If an initiator has been added to a host, the owning
vStore of the initiator can be modified only on the host.

Alias Alias of the iSCSI initiator.

[Value range]
– An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31
characters.
– The name can contain only letters, digits,
underscores (_), hyphens (-), and periods (.).

CHAP Specifies whether to enable CHAP authentication.

CHAP authentication includes Normal
Authentication and Discovery Authentication
options.
– If you enable CHAP, you must configure the
same CHAP name and password for the storage
system and the application server.
– If you do not enable CHAP, you do not need to
configure a CHAP name or password.

Normal The normal session is the process during which the

Authentication target and initiator transmit data between each
other after connections have been set up.
Authentication modes include:
– No authentication
– Unidirectional authentication
The target authenticates the initiator.
– Bidirectional authentication
The target and initiator authenticate each
other.

Discovery The discovery session is the process during which

Authentication the target and initiator are setting up connections.
Authentication modes include:
– No authentication
– Unidirectional authentication
The target authenticates the initiator.
– Bidirectional authentication
The target and initiator authenticate each
other.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

CHAP Name User name for CHAP authentication.

[Value range]
– The name must contain 4 to 223 characters.
– The name can contain only letters, digits, and
the following special characters:
!"#$&%'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
– The first character must be a letter or digit.

Password Password for CHAP authentication.

[Value range]
– The password must contain 12 to 16 characters.
– The password must contain at least three of the
following types of characters:

▪ Uppercase letters

▪ Lowercase letters

▪ Digits

▪ Special characters (including spaces)

!"#$&%'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
– The password must not be the same as the user
name or the user name spelt backwards.

Confirm Password Enter the password again for confirmation.

NOTE

If you choose Bidirectional authentication, you must configure the CHAP name and
password for Target Authenticates Initiator and Initiator Authenticates Target.
● NVMe over RoCE initiator
a. Select the vStore to which the initiator belongs from the Owning vStore
drop-down list.
NOTE

If an initiator has been added to a host, the owning vStore of the initiator can be
modified only on the host.
b. Set an alias for the NVMe over RoCE initiator.
NOTE

▪ An alias can be left blank or contain up to 31 characters.

▪ The value can contain only letters, digits, underscores (_), hyphens (-), and
periods (.).

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.8.4 Associating an Initiator with a Host

This section describes how to associate an initiator with a host.

Prerequisites
● An FC initiator whose owning vStore is the same as that of the created host
or whose owning vStore is -- can be added to the host.
● For iSCSI and NVMe over RoCE initiators, you can only add initiators whose
owning vStore is the same as that of the created host to the host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Initiators.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Initiators tab page, select an initiator type.

Step 4 Select an initiator and click Associate with Host.

NOTE

Alternatively, click More on the right of the initiator and select Associate with Host.

Step 5 Select a host.

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.8.5 Dissociating an Initiator from a Host

This section describes how to dissociate an initiator from a host.

Precautions
Removing an initiator will interrupt services on the host. Stop host services before
performing this operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Initiators.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Initiators tab page, select an initiator type.

Step 4 Select an initiator and click Dissociate from Host.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

NOTE

Alternatively, click More on the right of the initiator and select Dissociate from Host.

----End

5.8.6 Deleting an Initiator

This section describes how to delete an initiator.

Prerequisites
● Status of the initiator is Offline.
● The initiator is not associated with any host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Initiators.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Initiators tab page, select an initiator type.

Step 4 Select the desired initiator and click Delete.

NOTE

Alternatively, click More on the right of the initiator and select Delete to delete the desired
initiator.

Step 5 Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.9 Managing Host Groups

This section describes how to manage host groups.

5.9.1 Viewing Host Group Information

This section describes how to view basic information about all host groups.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Prerequisites
At least one host group has been created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, view the host group information in the function
pane. Table 5-48 describes the parameters.

Table 5-48 Host group parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of the host group.

NOTE
You can click the name of a host group to
view its details and manage it.

ID ID of the host group.

Owning vStore Name of the vStore to which the host

group belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when
vStore is set to All vStores in Step 2.

vStore ID ID of the vStore to which the host

group belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when
vStore is set to All vStores in Step 2.

LUN Capacity Usage Capacity usage of LUNs in the LUN

group mapped to the host group.

Hosts Number of hosts in a host group.

Step 4 (Optional) Click the name of the host group to query its summary, member hosts,
and mapping.

----End

5.9.2 Viewing Host LUN IDs

A host LUN ID is allocated by the storage system to a LUN mapped to a host. This
ID is visible on the host.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, click the name of the desired host group. On the
page that is displayed, click the Mapping tab page.

Step 4 Click View Host LUN ID.

The View Host LUN ID page is displayed on the right.

Step 5 View the LUNs mapped to hosts in the host group and their host LUN IDs.

----End

5.9.3 Modifying Host LUN IDs

This section describes how to modify host LUN IDs.

Prerequisites
Host services on the LUN have been stopped, and the virtual disk created by
multipathing software and physical disk corresponding to the LUN have been
uninstalled from the host.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, click the name of the desired host group. On the
page that is displayed, click the Mapping tab.

Step 4 Click More on the right of the desired LUN or LUN group and choose Modify Host
LUN ID.

The Modify Host LUN ID page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Modify Host LUN ID
page:
● On the Mapping tab page, click View Host LUN ID. On the View Host LUN ID page
that is displayed, click Modify in the upper right corner.
● Choose Services > Block Service > LUN Groups > LUN Groups and click the name of
the desired LUN group. On the page that is displayed, click the Mapping tab, then click
More on the right of the host or host group, and choose Modify Host LUN ID.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 5 Set the host LUN ID for each LUN. The value ranges from 0 to 4095.

Step 6 Select Advanced in the upper right corner and determine whether to select Same
Host LUN ID. If you select it, the system checks whether the host LUN IDs of the
local and remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro pairs are the same when you
change the host LUN IDs. In SAN-based HyperMetro scenarios involving ESX hosts,
if the host LUN IDs of the local and remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro pairs
are different, data may be inconsistent.

Step 7 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After a host LUN ID is modified, re-scan for disks on the host.

5.9.4 Adding a Port Group

This section describes how to add a port group for a LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, click the name of the desired host group. On the
page that is displayed, click the Mapping tab page.

Step 4 Select the desired LUN group and click Add Port Group.

The Add Port Group page is displayed on the right.

Step 5 Select a port group.

NOTE

You can click Create to create a port group.

Step 6 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.9.5 Removing a Port Group

This section describes how to remove a port group for a LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, click the name of the desired host group. On the
page that is displayed, click the Mapping tab page.
Step 4 Select the desired LUN group and click Remove Port Group.
Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.9.6 Mapping a LUN Group to a Host Group

This section describes how to create a mapping between a host group and a LUN
group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, choose Map > Map LUN Group.
The Map LUN Group page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Map LUN Group
page:
● Click More on the right of the desired host group and choose Map LUN Group.
● Click the name of the desired host group. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Map LUN Group from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Select a LUN group.

● If you select New:
a. Set the name of the new LUN group.
b. Select the storage pool to which the LUN group belongs. Set Application
Type for LUNs.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

The following preset application types are provided for typical applications:
Default, Oracle_OLAP, Oracle_OLTP, Oracle_OLAP&OLTP, SQL_Server_OLAP,
SQL_Server_OLTP, SQL_Server_OLAP&OLTP, SAP_HANA, Vmware_VDI, Hyper-
V_VDI, Others, and FusionAccess_VDI

▪ The preset application types specify the application request sizes. When
SmartCompression and SmartDedupe licenses are imported to the system, the
preset application types also display whether SmartCompression and
SmartDedupe are enabled. For details, see SmartDedupe and
SmartCompression Feature Guide for Block of the desired product model and
version.

▪ After you have set an application type for a LUN, you are unable to change it
in follow-up operations.

▪ If the application type configured for a LUN does not match the actual I/O
model, the LUN performance may deteriorate.

▪ If none of the preset application types matches the actual I/O model, you can
run the create lun_workload_type general command to create one. For
details on this command, refer to the Command Reference.

▪ Only 6.1.3 and later versions support Others.

c. Specify the LUN name prefix, capacity per LUN, and quantity. Table 5-49
describes the parameters.

Table 5-49 LUN parameters

Parameter Description

Name Prefix Name prefix of the LUN. The names of the new LUNs
are numbered in sequence based on the name prefix.

Capacity per Capacity of the LUN in the LUN group.

LUN NOTE

▪ The maximum capacity of the LUN must not exceed the

system specifications.

▪ You can set the capacity unit to Blocks to create LUNs by

block. A block is equal to 512 bytes. The LUN capacity
must not be smaller than 1024 blocks (that is, 512 KB).

▪ The storage system uses the following capacity

algorithms defined by Windows: 1 PB = 1,024 TB, 1 TB =
1,024 GB, 1 GB = 1,024 MB, 1 MB = 1,024 KB, and 1 KB =
1,024 bytes.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Parameter Description

Quantity Number of LUNs created in a batch. Set this

parameter based on site requirements.
[Value range]
1 to 500
NOTE

▪ LUNs created in a batch have the same capacity.

▪ When LUNs are created in a batch, the system

automatically adds suffixes to the names based on the
number of LUNs for distinction. You can click to
manually specify the start number for the suffixes.

d. (Optional) When creating LUNs in a batch, click and set the suffixes of
the LUNs. Related parameters include Suffix Digits and Suffix (start
number of the suffixes). The system adds a suffix to the end of each LUN
name in ascending order based on the specified start suffix number.
NOTE

▪ The value range of Suffix is 0 to (10000 – Quantity).

▪ For example, if you want to create 300 LUNs, the value range of Suffix is 0 to
9700.

e. (Optional) Click to add more LUNs.

f. (Optional) Click to remove LUNs.
● If you select Existing:
Select a LUN group from the list.
NOTE

You can select Include mapped LUN groups to query the LUN groups that have been
mapped to the current host group. For these LUN groups, mapping cannot be created
repeatedly.

Step 5 (Optional) Select a port group.

NOTE

If no port group exists in the system, click Create.

Step 6 Set how to assign host LUN IDs.

● Automatic: The system assigns a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.
● Start ID: Set a start ID ranging from 0 to 4095. The system assigns a host
LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host, starting from Start ID.
● Specified ID: Manually assign a host LUN ID to each LUN mapped to a host.
Step 7 If you select an existing LUN group, select Advanced in the upper right corner and
determine whether to select Same Host LUN ID. If you select it, the system
forcibly ensures that the host LUN IDs of the local and remote LUNs in the same
HyperMetro pairs are the same. In SAN-based HyperMetro scenarios involving ESX

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

hosts, if the host LUN IDs of the local and remote LUNs in the same HyperMetro
pairs are different, data may be inconsistent.

Step 8 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

NOTE

After the task is created successfully, the Execution Result page is displayed. You can view
details about the current task on this page.

----End

5.9.7 Unmapping a Host Group

This section describes how to cancel the mapping between a host group and a
LUN group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, click More on the right of the desired host group
and choose Unmap.

The Unmap Object page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform either of the following operations to go to the Unmap Object page:
● Click the name of the desired host group. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Unmap from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired host group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Mapping tab page, then click More on the right of the LUN group, and select Unmap.

Step 4 Select one or more objects from Available Objects.

NOTE

Skip this step if you cancel the mapping between a host group and a LUN group from the
Mapping tab page.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.9.8 Adding a Host

This section describes how to add a host to a host group.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, click More on the right of the desired host group
and choose Add Host.

The Add Host page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform any of the following operations to go to the Add Host page:
● Click the name of the desired host group. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Add Host from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired host group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Member Hosts tab page, and then click Add.
● Click the value in the Hosts column of the desired host group if the value is not 0. On
the Member Hosts tab page, click Add.

Step 4 Select one or more hosts from Available Hosts and add them to Selected Hosts.
NOTE

You can select Only show the hosts that have not been added to any host group below
the host list, which helps you find the desired hosts.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.9.9 Removing a Host

This section describes how to remove a host from a host group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, click More on the right of the desired host group
and choose Remove Host.

The Remove Host page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Alternatively, perform any of the following operations to remove hosts:

● Click the name of the desired host group. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Remove Host from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired host group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Member Hosts tab page, select the desired hosts, and click Remove.
● Click the name of the desired host group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Member Hosts tab page, click More on the right of the desired host, and select
Remove.
● Click the value in the Hosts column of the desired host group. On the Member Hosts
tab page, select the desired hosts and click Remove.
● Click the value in the Hosts column of the desired host group. On the Member Hosts
tab page, click More on the right of the desired host and select Remove.

Step 4 Select one or more hosts from Available Hosts and add them to Selected Hosts.
NOTE

Skip this step if you remove hosts from the Member Hosts tab page.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.9.10 Modifying the Properties of a Host Group

This section describes how to modify the name and description of a host group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, click More on the right of the desired host group
and choose Modify.

The Modify Host Group page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired host group. In the upper right corner of the
page that is displayed, select Modify from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Modify the properties of the host group.

1. Modify the Name for the host group.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

– The name must be unique.

– The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.), underscores (_), and hyphens
(-).
– The name contains 1 to 255 characters.
2. Modify Description for the host group.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

5.9.11 Deleting a Host Group

This section describes how to delete a host group when it is no longer needed.

Prerequisites
The host group to be deleted is not mapped.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Host Groups > Host Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 On the Host Groups tab page, click More on the right of the desired host group
and choose Delete.
NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired host group. In the upper right corner of the
page that is displayed, select Delete from the Operation drop-down list.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.10 Managing Port Groups

This chapter describes how to configure and manage port groups.

5.10.1 Viewing Port Group Information

This operation enables you to view information about port groups.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Port Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 View information about port groups in the function pane. Table 5-50 describes
the parameters.

Table 5-50 Port group parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a port group.

NOTE
You can click the name of a port group to
view its details and manage it.

Owning vStore Name of the vStore to which the port

group belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when
vStore is set to All vStores in Step 2.

vStore ID ID of the vStore to which the port

group belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when
vStore is set to All vStores in Step 2.

ID ID of a port group.

Ports Number of ports in a port group.

Port Type Type of ports in a port group.

Mapping Indicates whether a port group has

been mapped.

Step 4 (Optional) Click the name of a port group to query its summary and member
ports.

----End

5.10.2 Adding a Port

This operation enables you to add a port to a port group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Port Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Step 3 Click More on the right of the desired port group and select Add Port.
The Add Port page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, perform any of the following operations to go to the Add Port page:
● Click the name of the desired port group. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Add Port from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired port group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Member Ports tab page, and then click Add.
● Click the value in the Ports column of the desired port group if the value is not 0. On
the Member Ports tab page, click Add.

Step 4 In Available Ports, select one or more desired ports and they are added to
Selected Ports automatically.
NOTE

● A port can be added to multiple port groups.

● You can select Include the ports that are link down below the port list, which helps
you find the desired ports.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

5.10.3 Removing a Port

This operation enables you to remove a port from a port group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Port Groups.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the desired port group and select Remove Port.
The Remove Port page is displayed on the right.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

Alternatively, perform any of the following operations to remove ports:

● Click the name of the desired port group. In the upper right corner of the page that is
displayed, select Remove Port from the Operation drop-down list.
● Click the name of the desired port group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Member Ports tab page, select the desired ports, and click Remove.
● Click the name of the desired port group. On the page that is displayed, click the
Member Ports tab page, click More on the right of the desired port, and select
Remove.
● Click the value in the Ports column of the desired port group. On the Member Ports tab
page, select the desired ports and click Remove.
● Click the value in the Ports column of the desired port group. On the Member Ports tab
page, click More on the right of the desired port and select Remove.

Step 4 In Available Ports, select one or more desired ports and they are added to
Selected Ports automatically.
NOTE

Skip this step if you remove ports from the Member Ports tab page.

Step 5 Click OK.

Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.10.4 Modifying a Port Group

This operation enables you to change the name and modify the description of a
port group.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Port Groups.

Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the desired port group and select Modify.

The Modify Port Group page is displayed on the right.

NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired port group. In the upper right corner of the page
that is displayed, select Modify from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Modify the name of the port group.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

NOTE

● The name must be unique.

● The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.), underscores (_), and hyphens (-).
● The name contains 1 to 255 characters.

Step 5 Modify the description of the port group.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.10.5 Deleting a Port Group

This operation enables you to delete a port group.

Prerequisites
The port group to be deleted has not been mapped.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Port Groups.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 Click More on the right of the desired port group and select Delete.
NOTE

Alternatively, click the name of the desired port group. In the upper right corner of the page
that is displayed, select Delete from the Operation drop-down list.

Step 4 Confirm your operation as prompted.

----End

5.11 Viewing a Mapping View

This section describes how to view the mapping between LUNs or LUN groups and
hosts or host groups.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Services > Block Service > Mapping Views.
Step 2 Select the desired vStore from the vStore drop-down list in the upper left corner.
NOTE

Only 6.1.3 and later versions support multiple vStores.

Step 3 View the mapping view information in the function pane. Table 5-51 describes the
parameters.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 5 Managing Basic Storage Services

Table 5-51 Mapping view parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a mapping view.

NOTE
You can click a name to view the brief information about a mapping
view, as well as LUNs, LUN group, host, host group, and port group
in the mapping view.

ID ID of a mapping view.

Owning vStore Name of the vStore to which the mapping view belongs.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores in
Step 2.

vStore ID ID of the vStore to which the mapping view belongs.

NOTE
This parameter is available only when vStore is set to All vStores in
Step 2.

LUN Group Name of the LUN group in a mapping view.

Host Name of the host in a mapping view.

Host Group Name of the host group in a mapping view.

Port Group Name of the port group in a mapping view.

NOTE

Mapping views include mapping LUNs to hosts, mapping LUN groups to hosts, and
mapping LUN groups to host groups.
● In a mapping view where LUNs are mapped to a host, LUN Group and Host Group are
displayed as --. You can click the name of the mapping view and click the LUNs tab to
view the LUNs mapped to the host.
● In a mapping view where a LUN group is mapped to a host, Host Group is displayed as
--.
● In a mapping view where a LUN group is mapped to a host group, Host is displayed as
--.
● In a mapping view that does not contain a port group, Port Group is displayed as --.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 6 FAQs

6 FAQs

This chapter describes the FAQs related to the basic storage service configuration
guide. You can also refer to this chapter to handle faults encountered during
configuration or maintenance.
6.1 How Can I Enable Mapping Cancellation Fool-Proofing?
6.2 How Can I Query the iSCSI Target Name of an Ethernet Port on a Storage
System?

6.1 How Can I Enable Mapping Cancellation Fool-

Proofing?
To prevent users from falsely deleting a mapping in use, the storage system
provides the mapping cancellation fool-proofing function. This function is disabled
by default and can be enabled using the change tgt_switch map_foolproof
switch=on command.
After this function is enabled, the system checks whether there are I/O operations
when a user tries to remove a LUN or host during mapping cancellation. If there
are I/O operations, the system does not allow mapping cancellation.

NOTE

● Mapping cancellation operations include: unmap a LUN and a host, unmap a host and a
LUN group, unmap a host group and a LUN group, remove a LUN from a LUN group,
remove a host from a host group, and remove an initiator.
● After this function is enabled, the system checks whether there are I/O operations at the
point in time when an operation is performed. The system may incorrectly determine
the status of periodical or routine test services. Therefore, this function provides only
reference for you to determine the service status. You need to manually confirm
whether there are running services. If you confirm the involved LUN but the system still
displays a message indicating that I/O operations exist, disable this function and try
again.
● You can run the show tgt_switch map_foolproof command to check whether the
function is enabled. For more details, refer to the command reference specific to your
product version.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 6 FAQs

6.2 How Can I Query the iSCSI Target Name of an

Ethernet Port on a Storage System?
After an IP address is configured for an Ethernet port on a storage system, an
iSCSI target name is automatically generated on the Ethernet port.

Using the CLI

Log in to the CLI of the storage system and run the show iscsi target_name
eth_port_id=? command to query the iSCSI target name of the Ethernet port.
admin:/>show iscsi target_name eth_port_id=CTE0.B.IOM2.P0
iSCSI Target Name : iqn.2006-08.com.huawei:oceanstor:2100ac8d34eea90a::1020200:192.168.1.8
admin:/>

NOTE

● You can run the show port general physical_type=ETH logic_type=Host_Port

command to query the value of eth_port_id.
● For details on this command, refer to the command reference.

Using DeviceManager
Method 1:

Choose Services > Network > Ethernet Network > Ethernet Ports. Click the
desired Ethernet port and view its iSCSI Target Name on the page that is
displayed.

Method 2:

Step 1 Choose System > Hardware > Devices.

Step 2 Click the controller enclosure where the desired Ethernet port resides.

Step 3 Click to switch to the rear view of the controller enclosure.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block 6 FAQs

Step 4 Click the desired Ethernet port.

View the Ethernet port information in the displayed Ethernet Port: Port location
page on the right.

----End

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block A Configuring Basic Storage Services Using the CLI

A Configuring Basic Storage Services

Using the CLI

This section provides some CLI commands for configuring basic block storage
services.

NOTE

● The CLI commands supported by different models may vary.

● For more CLI commands and their description, see the Command Reference specific to
your product model and version.

Configuration Process
The following flowchart shows the common configuration process.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block A Configuring Basic Storage Services Using the CLI

Figure A-1 Process for configuring the block storage service

Start

Perform check before

configuration.
1. Prepare for configuration.

Log in to the storage

system using the CLI.

Create a storage pool.

2. Create storage space. Create a LUN.

If the data of an application is stored on multiple

Create a LUN group. LUNs, you can create a LUN group for these LUNs
for easier management.

Create a host.

If an application is deployed on a cluster consisting

of multiple hosts, these hosts will access the data
Create a host group. volumes of the application at the same time. In
this case, you can create a host group for these
hosts.
If specific ports are required for the
Create a port group. communication between a storage system and an
3. Create a mapping and application server, you can create a port group.
configure host connectivity.
Create a mapping.

Configure connectivity.

Use the storage space on

an application server.

End

Mandatory Optional

Preparing for the Configuration

Table A-1 Preparations

Item Reference

Pre-check (software installation For details, see "Check Before

check, security check, and Configuration."
network connection status
check)

Logging in to the storage For details, see "Logging In to the CLI" in the
system using the CLI Initialization Guide.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block A Configuring Basic Storage Services Using the CLI

Creating Storage Space

Table A-2 Commands for creating storage space

Procedure Command

Creating a storage pool create storage_pool

NOTE
● When you run the create storage_pool
command to create a storage pool, the system
automatically creates a disk domain in the
background.
● You can also run the create disk_domain and
create storage_pool commands to create a disk
domain and a storage pool, respectively.

Creating LUNs create lun

(Optional) Creating a LUN create lun_group

group

Creating Mappings and Configuring Host Connectivity

Table A-3 Commands for creating mappings and configuring host connectivity
Procedure Command

Creating a host create host

(Optional) Creating a host create host_group

group

(Optional) Creating a port create port_group

group

Creating a mapping create mapping_view

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block A Configuring Basic Storage Services Using the CLI

Procedure Command

Configuring host connectivity Host configuration:

For details, see "Preparing for Configuration"
and "Configuring Connectivity" in the Host
Connectivity Guide.
Storage configuration:
● Configuring storage service ports (iSCSI
connection)
Storage systems use logical ports to
establish iSCSI connections with hosts. The
home ports of logical ports can be physical
Ethernet ports, bond ports, or VLANs.
– (Optional) Creating a bond port:
create bond_port

– (Optional) Creating a VLAN:

create vlan general

– Creating a logical port

(Optional) Creating a logical port based
on a bond port:
create logical_port bond

(Optional) Creating a VLAN-based

logical port:
create logical_port vlan

Creating a logical port based on an

Ethernet port:
create logical_port eth

● Creating an initiator
– iSCSI connection:
create initiator iscsi

– Fibre Channel connection:

create initiator fc

– NVMe over RoCE connection:

create nvme_over_roce_initiator general

● Adding an initiator for a host

– iSCSI or Fibre Channel connection:
add host initiator

– NVMe over RoCE connection:

add host nvme_over_roce_initiator

Using storage space For details, see "Scanning LUNs on the Host"
in the Host Connectivity Guide.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block B Managing Basic Storage Services Using the CLI

B Managing Basic Storage Services Using

the CLI

This section provides some CLI commands for managing basic block storage
services.

NOTE

● The CLI commands supported by different models may vary.

● For more CLI commands and their description, see the Command Reference specific to
your product model and version.

Managing Storage Pools

Table B-1 Commands for managing storage pools

Operation Command

Creating a storage pool create storage_pool

Querying storage pools show storage_pool general

Modifying a storage pool change storage_pool general

Deleting a storage pool delete storage_pool

Managing LUNs

Table B-2 Commands for managing LUNs

Operation Command

Creating a LUN create lun

Querying LUNs show lun general

Modifying a LUN change lun

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block B Managing Basic Storage Services Using the CLI

Operation Command

Deleting a LUN delete lun

Creating an application type for a create lun_workload_type general

LUN

Querying the application type of a show lun_workload_type general

LUN

Changing the application type of a change lun_workload_type general

LUN

Deleting the application type of a delete lun_workload_type general

LUN

Querying information about the show lun mapping_view

mapping related to a specified
LUN

Managing LUN Groups

Table B-3 Commands for managing LUN groups

Operation Command

Creating a LUN group create lun_group

Querying LUN groups show lun_group general

Modifying a LUN group change lun_group

Deleting a LUN group delete lun_group

Adding LUNs to a LUN group add lun_group lun

Removing LUNs from a LUN group remove lun_group lun

Querying LUNs in a LUN group show lun_group lun

Querying information about the show lun_group mapping_view

mapping related to a specified
LUN group

Managing Hosts

Table B-4 Commands for managing hosts

Operation Command

Creating a host create host

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block B Managing Basic Storage Services Using the CLI

Operation Command

Querying hosts show host general

Modifying a host change host

Deleting a host delete host

Adding an initiator for a host add host initiator

Removing an initiator remove host initiator

Scanning for hosts where scan host

UltraPath is installed

Enabling or disabling the change host_auto_scan

automatic host discovery function

Checking whether the automatic show host_auto_scan

host discovery function is enabled

Querying the host group to which show host host_group

a host is added

Querying all LUNs mapped to a show host lun

host

Querying the host to which a LUN show lun host

is mapped

Querying host link information in a show host link

storage system

Querying information about the show host mapping_view

mapping related to a specified
host

Managing Initiators

Table B-5 Commands for managing initiators

Operation Command

Creating an initiator create initiator iscsi

create initiator fc
create nvme_over_roce_initiator general

Querying initiators show initiator

show nvme_over_roce_initiator general

Modifying an initiator change initiator

change nvme_over_roce_initiator general

Deleting an initiator delete initiator iscsi

delete initiator fc
delete nvme_over_roce_initiator general

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block B Managing Basic Storage Services Using the CLI

Managing Host Groups

Table B-6 Commands for managing host groups

Operation Command

Creating a host group create host_group

Querying host groups show host_group general

Modifying a host group change host_group general

Deleting a host group delete host_group

Adding hosts to a host group add host_group host

Removing hosts from a host group remove host_group host

Querying hosts in a host group show host_group host

Querying information about the show host_group mapping_view

mapping related to a specified
host group

Managing Port Groups

Table B-7 Commands for managing port groups

Operation Command

Creating a port group create port_group

Querying port groups show port_group general

Modify a port group change port_group general

Deleting a port group delete port_group

Adding ports to a port group add port_group port

Removing ports from a port group remove port_group port

Querying ports in a port group show port_group port

Querying information about the show port_group mapping_view

mapping related to a specified
port group

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block B Managing Basic Storage Services Using the CLI

Managing Mappings

Table B-8 Commands for managing mappings

Operation Command

Creating a mapping create mapping_view

Querying mappings show mapping_view general

Modifying a mapping change mapping_view

Deleting a mapping delete mapping_view

Adding a host group to a mapping add mapping_view host_group

Removing a host group from a remove mapping_view host_group

mapping

Adding a LUN group to a mapping add mapping_view lun_group

Removing a LUN group from a remove mapping_view lun_group

mapping

Adding a port group to a mapping add mapping_view port_group

Removing a port group from a remove mapping_view port_group

mapping

Querying host groups in a show mapping_view host_group

mapping

Querying LUN groups in a show mapping_view lun_group

mapping

Querying port groups in a show mapping_view port_group

mapping

Managing the Service Network

Table B-9 Commands for managing Ethernet ports

Operation Command

Querying Ethernet ports show port general physical_type=ETH

logic_type=Host_Port

Modifying an Ethernet port change port eth

Querying bit errors show port bit_error

NOTE
You can also run this command to query bit
errors on other types of ports.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block B Managing Basic Storage Services Using the CLI

Table B-10 Commands for managing bond ports

Operation Command

Creating a bond port create bond_port

Querying bond ports show bond_port

Modifying a bond port change bond_port general

Deleting a bond port delete bond_port

Table B-11 Commands for managing VLANs

Operation Command

Creating a VLAN create vlan general

Querying VLANs show vlan general

Modifying a VLAN change vlan general

Deleting a VLAN delete vlan general

Table B-12 Commands for managing logical ports

Operation Command

Creating a logical port ● Creating a logical port based on a bond

port:
create logical_port bond

● Creating a VLAN-based logical port:

create logical_port vlan

● Creating a logical port based on an

Ethernet port:
create logical_port eth

Querying logical ports show logical_port general

Modifying a logical port change logical_port general

Deleting a logical port delete logical_port general

Adding a route for a logical port ● IPv4 network:

add logical_port ipv4_route

● IPv6 network:
add logical_port ipv6_route

Querying routes of a logical port show logical_port route

Deleting routes of a logical port ● IPv4 network:

remove logical_port ipv4_route

● IPv6 network:
remove logical_port ipv6_route

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block B Managing Basic Storage Services Using the CLI

Table B-13 Commands for managing the RoCE network

Operation Command

Querying RoCE ports show port general physical_type=RoCE

Modifying a RoCE port change port roce

Table B-14 Commands for managing the Fibre Channel network

Operation Command

Querying Fibre Channel ports show port general physical_type=FC

Modifying a Fibre Channel port change port fc

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block C How to Obtain Help

C How to Obtain Help

If a tough or critical problem persists in routine maintenance or troubleshooting,

contact Huawei for technical support.

C.1 Preparations for Contacting Huawei

To better solve the problem, you need to collect troubleshooting information and
make debugging preparations before contacting Huawei.

C.1.1 Collecting Troubleshooting Information

You need to collect troubleshooting information before troubleshooting.
You need to collect the following information:
● Name and address of the customer
● Contact person and telephone number
● Time when the fault occurred
● Description of the fault phenomena
● Device type and software version
● Measures taken after the fault occurs and the related results
● Troubleshooting level and required solution deadline

C.1.2 Making Debugging Preparations

When you contact Huawei for help, the technical support engineer of Huawei
might assist you to do certain operations to collect information about the fault or
rectify the fault directly.
Before contacting Huawei for help, you need to prepare the boards, port modules,
screwdrivers, screws, cables for serial ports, network cables, and other required
materials.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block C How to Obtain Help

C.2 How to Use the Document

Huawei provides guide documents shipped with the device. The guide documents
can be used to handle the common problems occurring in daily maintenance or
troubleshooting.
To better solve the problems, use the documents before you contact Huawei for
technical support.

C.3 How to Obtain Help from Website

Huawei provides users with timely and efficient technical support through the
regional offices, secondary technical support system, telephone technical support,
remote technical support, and onsite technical support.
Contents of the Huawei technical support system are as follows:
● Huawei headquarters technical support department
● Regional office technical support center
● Customer service center
● Technical support website: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/
You can query how to contact the regional offices at https://
support.huawei.com/enterprise/.

C.4 Ways to Contact Huawei

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical
support and service. For any assistance, contact our local office or company
headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's
Republic of China
Website: https://e.huawei.com/

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

D Glossary

A
AC power module The module that transfers the external AC power
supply into the power supply for internal use.
Application server A service processing node (a computer device) on the
network. Application programs of data services run
on the application server.
Asynchronous remote A kind of remote replication. When the data at the
replication primary site is updated, the data does not need to be
updated synchronously at the mirroring site to finish
the update. In this way, performance is not reduced
due to data mirroring.
Air baffle It optimizes the ventilation channels and improves
the heat dissipation capability of the system.
Audit log guarantee A mode for recording audit logs. This mode
mode preferentially ensures that the audit log function is
normal and no audit log is missing.
Audit log non- A mode for recording audit logs. In this mode,
guarantee mode services are running properly. Audit logs may be
missing.

B
Backup A collection of data stored on (usually removable)
non-volatile storage media for purposes of recovery
in case the original copy of data is lost or becomes
inaccessible; also called a backup copy. To be useful
for recovery, a backup must be made by copying the
source data image when it is in a consistent state.
The act of creating a backup.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

Backup window An interval of time during which a set of data can be

backed up without seriously affecting applications
that use the data.
Bandwidth The numerical difference between the upper and
lower frequencies of a band of electromagnetic
radiation. A deprecated synonym for data transfer
capacity that is often incorrectly used to refer to
throughput.
Baud rate The maximum rate of signal state changes per
second on a communications circuit. If each signal
state change corresponds to a code bit, then the
baud rate and the bit rate are the same. It is also
possible for signal state changes to correspond to
more than one code bit, so the baud rate may be
lower than the code bit rate.
Bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted
digital signal and the corresponding bit in the
received digital signal.
Bit error rate The probability that a transmitted bit will be
erroneously received. The bit error rate (BER) is
measured by counting the number of bits in error at
the output of a receiver and dividing by the total
number of bits in the transmission. BER is typically
expressed as a negative power of 10.
Bonding Bonding of multiple independent physical network
ports into a logical port, which ensures the high
availability of server network connections and
improves network performance.
Boundary scan A test methodology that uses shift registers in the
output connections of integrated circuits (ICs). One IC
is often connected to the next IC. A data pattern is
passed through the chain and the observed returned
data stream affected by the circuit conditions gives
an indication of any faults present. The system is
defined under IEEE standard 1149.1 and is also
known as Joint Test Action Group (JTAG).
Browser/Server Architecture that defines the roles of the browser and
server. The browser is the service request party and
the server is the service provider.
Built-in FRU Alarm It indicates errors on the built-in FRUs of a controller,
indicator such as errors on fans or memory modules.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

C
Cache hit ratio The ratio of the number of cache hits to the number
of all I/Os during a read task, usually expressed as a
percentage.
Captive screw Specially designed to lock into place on a parent
board or motherboard, allowing for easy installation
and removal of attached pieces without release of
the screw.
Challenge Handshake A password-based authentication protocol that uses a
Authentication challenge to verify that a user has access rights to a
Protocol system. A hash of the supplied password with the
challenge is sent for comparison so the cleartext
password is never sent over the connection.
Compliance mode A protection mode of WORM. In compliance mode,
files within their protection period cannot be changed
or deleted by either the file user or by the system
administrator. Files with expired protection periods
can be deleted but not changed by the file user or
the system administrator.
Controller The control logic in a disk or tape that performs
command decoding and execution, host data transfer,
serialization and deserialization of data, error
detection and correction, and overall management of
device operations. The control logic in a storage
subsystem that performs command transformation
and routing, aggregation (RAID, mirroring, striping, or
other), high-level error recovery, and performance
optimization for multiple storage devices.
Controller enclosure An enclosure that accommodates controllers and
provides storage services. It is the core component of
a storage system and generally consists of
components, such as controllers, power supplies, and
fans.
Copying A pair state. The state indicates that the source LUN
data is being synchronized to the target LUN.
Container root Space used to store the metadata for running
directory container images and container instances.
Container image An image is a special file system, which provides the
programs, libraries, resources, and configuration files
required for running containers. It also contains
configuration parameters, for example, for
anonymous disks, environment variables, and users.
The image does not contain dynamic data, and its
content will not be modified after construction.
Containerized An image can start multiple containers, and an
application application can contain one or a group of containers.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

Container node Controller that runs the container service.

Configuration item list A series of modifiable configuration items defined in
the Helm chart of the container.
Container service Containerized application management service, which
manages the lifecycle of containerized applications.

D
Data compression The process of encoding data to reduce its size. Lossy
compression (i.e., compression using a technique in
which a portion of the original information is lost) is
acceptable for some forms of data (e.g., digital
images) in some applications, but for most IT
applications, lossless compression (i.e., compression
using a technique that preserves the entire content of
the original data, and from which the original data
can be reconstructed exactly) is required.
Data flow A process that involves processing data extracted
from the source system. These processes include:
filtering, integration, calculation, and summary,
finding and solving data inconsistency, and deleting
invalid data so that the processed data meets the
requirements of the destination system for the input
data.
Data migration A movement of data or information between
information systems, formats, or media. Migration is
performed for reasons such as possible decay of
storage media, obsolete hardware or software
(including obsolete data formats), changing
performance requirements, the need for cost
efficiencies etc.
Data source A system, database (database user; database
instance), or file that can make BOs persistent.
Deduplication The replacement of multiple copies of data — at
variable levels of granularity — with references to a
shared copy in order to save storage space and/or
bandwidth.
Dirty data Data that is stored temporarily on the cache and has
not been written onto disks.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

Disaster recovery The recovery of data, access to data and associated

processing through a comprehensive process of
setting up a redundant site (equipment and work
space) with recovery of operational data to continue
business operations after a loss of use of all or part
of a data center. This involves not only an essential
set of data but also an essential set of all the
hardware and software to continue processing of that
data and business. Any disaster recovery may involve
some amount of down time.
Disk array A set of disks from one or more commonly accessible
disk subsystems, combined with a body of control
software. The control software presents the disks'
storage capacity to hosts as one or more virtual disks.
Control software is often called firmware or
microcode when it runs in a disk controller. Control
software that runs in a host computer is usually
called a volume manager.
Disk domain A disk domain consists of the same type or different
types of disks. Disk domains are isolated from each
other. Therefore, services carried by different disk
domains do not affect each other in terms of
performance and faults (if any).
Disk enclosure Consists of the following parts in redundancy:
expansion module, disk, power module, and fan
module. System capacity can be expanded by
cascading multiple disk enclosures.
Disk location The process of locating a disk in the storage system
by determining the enclosure ID and slot ID of the
disk.
Disk utilization The percentage of used capacity in the total available
capacity.

E
eDevLUN Logical storage array space created by a third-party
storage array.
Expansion module A component used for expansion.
Expansion Connects a storage system to more disk enclosures
through connection cables, expanding the capacity of
the storage system.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

F
Field replaceable unit A unit or component of a system that is designed to
be replaced in the field, i.e., without returning the
system to a factory or repair depot. Field replaceable
units may either be customer-replaceable or their
replacement may require trained service personnel.
Firmware Low-level software for booting and operating an
intelligent device. Firmware generally resides in read-
only memory (ROM) on the device.
Flash Translation Layer Flash Translation Layer (FTL) organizes and manages
host data, enables host data to be allocated to NAND
flash chips of SSDs in an orderly manner, maintains
the mapping relationship between logical block
addresses (LBAs) and physical block addresses
(PBAs), and implements garbage collection, wear
leveling, and bad block management.
Front-end port The port that connects the controller enclosure to the
service side and transfers service data. There are
three types of front-end ports: SAS, Fibre Channel,
and iSCSI.
Front-end interconnect On a storage device, all controllers share the front-
I/O module (FIM) end interface modules.

G
Garbage collection The process of reclaiming resources that are no
longer in use. Garbage collection has uses in many
aspects of computing and storage. For example, in
flash storage, background garbage collection can
improve write performance by reducing the need to
perform whole block erasures prior to a write.
Gateway A device that receives data via one protocol and
transmits it via another.
Global garbage With a view to defragmentation of storage arrays
collection and garbage collection of disks, global garbage
collection reduces garbage of disks by enabling
storage arrays to inform disks of not implementing
invalid data relocation and of controlling space
release so that disks and controllers consume less
space, reducing costs and prolonging the useful life
of storage arrays.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

Global system for The second-generation mobile networking standard

mobile defined by the European Telecommunications
communications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a
standard for global mobile phone networks. GSM
consists of three main parts: mobile switching
subsystem (MSS), base station subsystem (BSS), and
mobile station (MS).
Global wear leveling With a view to individual characteristics of a single
disk, global wear leveling uses space allocation and
write algorithms to achieve wear leveling among
disks, preventing a disk from losing efficacy due to
excessive writes and prolonging the useful life of the
disk.

H
Hard disk tray The tray that bears the hard disk.
Heartbeat Heartbeat supports node communication, fault
diagnosis, and event triggering. Heartbeats are
protocols that require no acknowledgement. They are
transmitted between two devices. The device can
judge the validity status of the peer device.
Hit ratio The ratio of directly accessed I/Os from the cache to
all I/Os.
Hot swap The substitution of a replacement unit (RU) in a
system for a defective unit, where the substitution
can be performed while the system is performing its
normal functioning normally. Hot swaps are physical
operations typically performed by humans.
HyperMetro A value-added service of storage systems.
HyperMetro means two datasets (on two storage
systems) can provide storage services as one dataset
to achieve load balancing among applications and
failover without service interruption.
HyperMetro domain A HyperMetro configuration object generally; made
up of two storage arrays and one quorum server.
HyperMetro services can be created on a HyperMetro
domain.
HyperMetro vStore A HyperMetro vStore pair consists of two vStores,
pair that is, two tenants. After a HyperMetro relationship
is set up for a pair of vStores, the datasets in the two
vStores work in redundancy mode and provide
storage services in one dataset view, achieving hitless
service failover.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

HyperMetro-Inner On an eight-controller network, with HyperMetro-

Inner, continuous mirroring, back-end global sharing,
and three-copy technologies, a storage system can
tolerate one-by-one failures of seven controllers
among eight controllers, concurrent failures of two
controllers, and failure of a controller enclosure.
Handle A handle resides on the structural part of a module. It
is used to insert or remove a module into or from a
chassis, not helpful in saving efforts.
Helm chart A Helm chart is in TAR format. It is similar to the deb
package of APT or the rpm package of Yum. It
contains a group of yaml files that define Kubernetes
resources.

I
In-band management The management control information of the network
and the carrier service information of the user
network are transferred through the same logical
channel. In-band management enables users to
manage storage arrays through commands.
Management commands are sent through service
channels, such as I/O write and read channels. The
advantages of in-band management include high
speed, stable transfer, and no additional
management network ports required.
Initiator The system component that originates an I/O
command over an I/O interconnect. The endpoint
that originates a SCSI I/O command sequence. I/O
adapters, network interface cards, and intelligent I/O
interconnect control ASICs are typical initiators.
I/O Shorthand for input/output. I/O is the process of
moving data between a computer system's main
memory and an external device or interface such as a
storage device, display, printer, or network connected
to other computer systems. This encompasses
reading, or moving data into a computer system's
memory, and writing, or moving data from a
computer system's memory to another location.
Interface module A replaceable field module that accommodates the
service or management ports.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

L
Load balance A method of adjusting the system, application
components, and data to averagely distribute the
applied I/Os or computing requests to physical
resources of the system.
Logical unit The addressable entity within a SCSI target that
executes I/O commands.
Logical unit number The SCSI identifier of a logical unit within a target.
Industry shorthand, when phrased as "LUN", for the
logical unit indicated by the logical unit number.
LUN formatting The process of writing 0 bits in the data area of the
logical drive and generating related parity bits so that
the logical drive can be in the ready state.
LUN mapping A storage system maps LUNs to application servers
so that application servers can access storage
resources.
LUN migration A method for the LUN data to migrate between
different physical storage spaces while ensuring data
integrity and uninterrupted operation of host
services.
LUN snapshot A type of snapshot created for a LUN. This snapshot
is both readable and writable and is mainly used to
provide a snapshot LUN from point-in-time LUN
data.
Lever A lever resides on the structural part of a module. It
is used to insert or remove a module into or from a
chassis, saving efforts.
Local image repository A private repository used to store the container
images and Helm charts imported by users. It is
different from the standard image repository. The
imported images and Helm charts must meet the
compatibility requirements of the system.

M
Maintenance terminal A computer connected through a serial port or
management network port. It maintains the storage
system.
Management interface The module that integrates one or more
module management network ports.
Management network An entity that provides means to transmit and
process network management information.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

Management network The network port on the controller enclosure

port connected to the maintenance terminal. It is provided
for the remote maintenance terminal. Its IP address
can be modified with the change of the customer's
environment.

N
NVM Express A host controller interface with a register interface
and command set designed for PCI Express-based
SSDs.
NVMe SSD A solid state disk (SSD) with a non-volatile memory
express (NVMe) interface. Compared with other
SSDs, such SSDs can deliver higher performance and
shorter latency.

O
Out-of-band A management mode used during out-of-band
management networking. The management and control
information of the network and the bearer service
information of the user network are transmitted
through different logical channels.

P
Power failure When an external power failure occurs, the AC PEM
protection depends on the battery for power supply. This
ensures the integrity of the dirty data in the cache.
Pre-copy When the system monitors a failing member disk in a
RAID group, the system copies the data from the disk
to a hot spare disk in advance.
Palm-sized NVMe SSD A palm-sized NVMe SSD is a type of NVMe SSD of
which the dimensions (H x W x D) are 160 mm x 79.8
mm x 9.5 mm (neither 3.5-inch nor 2.5-inch).

Q
Quorum server A server that can provide arbitration services for
clusters or HyperMetro to prevent the resource access
conflicts of multiple application servers.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

Quorum Server Mode A HyperMetro arbitration mode. When a HyperMetro

arbitration occurs, the quorum server decides which
site wins the arbitration.

R
RAID level The application of different redundancy types to a
logical drive. A RAID level improves the fault
tolerance or performance of the logical drive but
reduces the available capacity of the logical drive.
You must specify a RAID level for each logical drive.
Reconstruction The regeneration and writing onto one or more
replacement disks of all of the user data and check
data from a failed disk in a mirrored or RAID array. In
most arrays, a rebuild can occur while applications
are accessing data on the array's virtual disks.
Redundancy The inclusion of extra components of a given type in
a system (beyond those required by the system to
carry out its function) for the purpose of enabling
continued operation in the event of a component
failure.
Remote replication A core technology for disaster recovery and a
foundation that implements remote data
synchronization and disaster recovery. This
technology remotely maintains a set of data mirrors
through the remote data connection function of the
storage devices that are separated in different places.
Even when a disaster occurs, the data backup on the
remote storage device is not affected. Remote
replication can be divided into synchronous remote
replication and asynchronous remote replication.
Reverse The process of restoring data from the redundancy
synchronization machine (RM) when the services of the production
machine (PM) are recovering.
Route The path that network traffic takes from its source to
its destination. On a TCP/IP network, each IP packet
is routed independently. Routes can change
dynamically.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

S
Script A parameterized list of primitive I/O interconnect
operations intended to be executed in sequence.
Often used with respect to ports, most of which are
able to execute scripts of I/O commands
autonomously (without policy processor assistance).
A sequence of instructions intended to be parsed and
carried out by a command line interpreter or other
scripting language. Perl, VBScript, JavaScript and Tcl
are all scripting languages.
Serial port An input/output location (channel) that sends and
receives data (one bit at a time) to and from the CPU
of a computer or a communications device. Serial
ports are used for serial data communication and as
interfaces for some peripheral devices, such as mouse
devices and printers.
Service data The user and/or network information required for the
normal functioning of services.
Service network port The network port that is used to store services.
Simple network An IETF protocol for monitoring and managing
management protocol systems and devices in a network. The data being
monitored and managed is defined by an MIB. The
functions supported by the protocol are the request
and retrieval of data, the setting or writing of data,
and traps that signal the occurrence of events.
Single point of failure One component or path in a system, the failure of
which would make the system inoperable.
Slot A position defined by an upper guide rail and the
corresponding lower guide rail in a frame. A slot
houses a board.
Small computer system A collection of ANSI standards and proposed
interface standards that define I/O interconnects primarily
intended for connecting storage subsystems or
devices to hosts through host bus adapters. Originally
intended primarily for use with small (desktop and
desk-side workstation) computers, SCSI has been
extended to serve most computing needs, and is
arguably the most widely implemented I/O
interconnect in use today.
Snapshot A point in time copy of a defined collection of data.
Clones and snapshots are full copies. Depending on
the system, snapshots may be of files, LUNs, file
systems, or any other type of container supported by
the system.
Snapshot copy A copy of a snapshot LUN.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

Source LUN The LUN where the original data is located.

Static Priority Mode A HyperMetro arbitration mode. When a HyperMetro
arbitration occurs, the preferred site always wins the
arbitration.
Storage system An integrated system that consists of the following
parts: controller, storage array, host bus adapter,
physical connection between storage units, and all
control software.
Storage unit An abstract definition of backup storage media for
storing backup data. The storage unit is connected to
the actual storage media used to back up data.
Streaming media Streaming media is media continuously streamed
over the network. Combining technologies
concerning streaming media data collection,
compression, encoding, storage, transmission,
playback, and network communications, streaming
media can provide high-quality playback effects in
real time at low bandwidth.
Subnet A type of smaller network that forms a larger
network according to a rule, such as, forming a
network according to different districts. This
facilitates the management of a large network.
Smart disk enclosure Being compared with traditional disk enclosures, the
smart disk enclosures are equipped with Arm chips
and DDR memories or other computing modules to
achieve powerful computing capabilities. With such
capabilities, the smart disk enclosures can help
controllers to share some computing loads,
accelerating data processing.
Share authentication During vStore configuration synchronization, the
share authentication information (including the share
information and domain controller configuration) is
synchronized to the secondary end.

T
Target The endpoint that receives a SCSI I/O command
sequence.
Target LUN The LUN on which target data resides.
Thin LUN A logic disk that can be accessed by hosts. It
dynamically allocates storage resources from the thin
pool according to the actual capacity requirements of
users.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

Topology The logical layout of the components of a computer

system or network and their interconnections.
Topology deals with questions of what components
are directly connected to other components from the
standpoint of being able to communicate. It does not
deal with questions of physical location of
components or interconnecting cables. The
communication infrastructure that provides Fibre
Channel communication among a set of PN_Ports
(e.g., a Fabric, an Arbitrated Loop, or a combination
of the two).
Trim A method by which the host operating system may
inform a storage device of data blocks that are no
longer in use and can be reclaimed. Many storage
protocols support this functionality via various
names, e.g., ATA TRIM and SCSI UNMAP.

U
User interface The space where users interact with a machine.
U-shaped bracket It is an optional structural part like letter "U". It is
located between the mounting ear of a chassis and
the mounting bar of a cabinet or bay and is used to
adjust the locations of the chassis and mounting bar
of the cabinet or bay.

W
Wear leveling A set of algorithms utilized by a flash controller to
distribute writes and erases across the cells in a flash
device. Cells in flash devices have a limited ability to
survive write cycles. The purpose of wear leveling is
to delay cell wear out and prolong the useful life of
the overall flash device.
Write amplification Increase in the number of write operations by the
device beyond the number of write operations
requested by hosts.
Write amplification The ratio of the number of write operations on the
factor device to the number of write operations requested
by the host.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block D Glossary

Write back A caching technology in which the completion of a

write request is signaled as soon as the data is in the
cache. Actual writing to non-volatile media occurs at
a later time. Write back includes inherent risks: an
application will take action predicated on the write
completion signal, and a system failure before the
data is written to non-volatile media will cause
media contents to be inconsistent with that
subsequent action. For these reasons, sufficient write
back implementations include mechanisms to
preserve cache contents across system failures
(including power failures) and a flushed cache at
system restart time.
Write Once Read Many A type of storage, designed for fixed content, that
preserves what is written to it in an immutable
fashion. Optical disks are an example of WORM
storage.
Write through A caching technology in which the completion of a
write request is not signaled until data is safely
stored on non-volatile media. Write performance
equipped with the write through technology is
approximately that of a non-cached system. However,
if the written data is also held in a cache, subsequent
read performance may be dramatically improved.

Z
Zone A collection of Fibre Channel N_Ports and/or
NL_Ports (i.e., device ports) that are permitted to
communicate with each other via the fabric. Any two
N_Ports and/or NL_Ports that are not members of at
least one common zone are not permitted to
communicate via the fabric. Zone membership may
be specified by: 1) port location on a switch, (i.e.,
Domain_ID and port number); or, 2) the device's
N_Port_Name; or, 3) the device's address identifier;
or, 4) the device's Node_Name. Well-known
addresses are implicitly included in every zone.

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block E Acronyms and Abbreviations

E Acronyms and Abbreviations

C
CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol
CLI Command-Line Interface

F
FC Fiber Channel

G
GPT GUID Partition Table
GUI Graphical User Interface

H
HBA Host Bus Adapter

I
IE Internet Explorer
IP Internet Protocol
IQN iSCSI Qualified Name
iSCSI Internet Small Computer Systems Interface
iSNS Internet Storage Name Service

L
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
LUN Logical Unit Number

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255

OceanStor Dorado
Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block E Acronyms and Abbreviations

SAS Serial Attached SCSI

SCSI Small Computer System Interface
SSD Solid-State Drive

W
WWN World Wide Name
WWPN World Wide Port Name

Issue 02 (2022-01-25) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256